Chrysler Automobile 300SRT User Manual

2 0 1 0

300

O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

S R T

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ⅵ Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Ⅵ How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ⅵ Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Ⅵ Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized

Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-

LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision nicians and genuine MOPAR௡ parts, and cares about

workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all your satisfaction.

essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-

tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint

you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,

located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented

documents. Please take the time to read these publica-

tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-

mendations in this manual will help assure safe and

enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section

contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the

items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and

illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual

contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the

symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout

this Owner’s Manual:

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored

in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain

with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will

be aware of all safety warnings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-

erating procedures that could result in an accident or

bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-

dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you

do not read this entire manual, you may miss important

information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left

front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible

from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This

number also appears on the Automobile Information

Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the

vehicle registration, and the title.

VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and

may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or

death.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

Ⅵ A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Ⅵ Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 17

▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

▫ Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition . . . . . . . . . 14

▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Ⅵ Illuminated Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Ⅵ Sentry Key௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Ⅵ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 23 Ⅵ Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 23 Ⅵ Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Ⅵ Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 24 Ⅵ Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Ⅵ Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

▫ Passive Entry System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 32

▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Ⅵ Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 49

▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode

— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 50

▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert௡) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 53

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —

▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 60

▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Ⅵ Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 78

Ⅵ Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

NOTE: With Keyless Go, the Electronic Vehicle Infor-

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system mation Center (EVIC) will display the ignition switch

consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your

integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into Instrument Panel” for further information.

the ignition switch with either side up.

Keyless Go Feature

This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Go

feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And

Operating” for further information.

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an

ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with

detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-

tions are OFF, ACC, and RUN. The START position is a

spring-loaded momentary contact position. When re-

leased from the START position, the switch automatically

returns to the RUN position.

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)

1 — LOCK

3 — RUN

2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)

4 — START

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

Key Fob

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch

The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and

the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an then pull the key out with your other hand.

emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry/

Keyless Go (PEKG), the Key Fob will also contain a

special receiver that communicates with the vehicle.

Passive Entry/Keyless Go Key Fobs can only be used

with Passive Entry/Keyless Go equipped vehicles. Non-

Passive Entry/Keyless Go Key Fobs can only be used

with Non-Passive Entry/Keyless Go vehicles.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle

should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter

go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove

box. You can keep the emergency key with you when

valet parking.

Emergency Key Removal

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key

into the lock cylinders with either side up.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Removing Key Fob From Ignition

Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the

OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.

and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 min-

utes after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position. Opening either front door will cancel this

feature. The time for this feature is programmable.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”

for further information.

With the Passive Entry/Keyless Go system, the EVIC will

display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

WARNING!

NOTE:

•

For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), the power window

switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and

power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in

the ignition or a vehicle equipped with Keyless Go in

the ACC or RUN mode. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

•

For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power

window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

SENTRY KEYா

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer System prevents unautho-

rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The

system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation

is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked

or unlocked.

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always

remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all

doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition

Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.

Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the

vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The

system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid

Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle.

Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the

ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,

sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.

NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds

when the ignition Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC

position.

After placing the ignition switch in the RUN position, the

Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a

bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it

indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. This

condition will result in the engine being shut off after two

seconds.

With Keyless Go, opening the driver’s door when the

vehicle’s ignition switch is placed in ACC or RUN

(engine stopped) will cause the reminder chime to sound.

Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And Operat-

ing” for further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal

vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-

onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.

Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as

possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

•

Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and

lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-

tended.

For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go, always

remember to place the ignition in OFF.

NOTE: The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer System is not

compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems.

Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting

problems and loss of security protection.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided

with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).

Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is

required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.

Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-

rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a

blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob

is one that has never been programmed.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have

been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the

vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the

vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it

cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer

System serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to

the authorized dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

Customer Key Programming

the following audible and visible signals: the horn will

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be pulse, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals

performed at an authorized dealer.

will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instru-

ment cluster will flash.

General Information

The Sentry Key௡ system complies with FCC rules Part 15 Rearming of the System

and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to

subject to the following conditions:

disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn

off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off

after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will

•

This device may not cause harmful interference.

This device must accept any interference that may be rearm itself.

received, including interference that may cause undes-

To Arm the System

ired operation.

Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Go

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors

for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch (and

Keyless Go Start/Stop button) for unauthorized opera-

tion. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security

Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide

Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press

a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger

door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is

closed, or if all doors are closed, the Vehicle Security

Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

time, the Vehicle Security Light will flash. If it does not To Disarm the System

illuminate, the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming. In

Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Go

addition, if you open a door during the arming period,

the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming pro-

cess. If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after

closing the door, you must repeat one of the previously-

described arming sequences.

Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter

or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and

turn the key to the ON position.

NOTE:

•

The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on

the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle

Security Alarm.

Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go

Press the Keyless Go Start/Stop button until the Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) indicates that

the vehicle ignition is ЉOFFЉ (refer to “Starting Proce-

dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-

tion). Then either press the power door LOCK switch

while the driver or passenger door is open, press the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK button or

press the Passive Entry Door Handle LOCK button (refer

to “Door Locks” in “Things To Know Before Starting” for

further information).

•

The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during

trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not

disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters

the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the

alarm will sound.

•

When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior

power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your further information), press the Keyless Go Start/Stop

vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle),

Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one or insert a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch (if the

of the previously-described arming sequences has oc- Start/Stop button is removed) and rotate it to the RUN

curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of position.

whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the

vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this

If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in

occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Tamper Alert

your absence, the horn will sound three times when you

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for

becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will tampering.

remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The

exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the

ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm

the Vehicle Security Alarm.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or unlock any

door.

Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds

or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition

switch is turned ON from the LOCK position.

Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter

or grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (refer to

“Door Locks” in “Things To Know Before Starting” for

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the

dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme

downward position), unless the overhead map/reading

lights are turned on manually.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,

open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-

tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held

Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does

not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the

system.

Key Fob with RKE Transmitter

To Unlock the Doors

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE

transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice

within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal

lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The

illuminated entry system will also turn on.

NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into

the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE

transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKE

transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds

5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter

buttons for all RKE transmitters.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

If your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal

“Passive Entry System — If Equipped” under “Door Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-

Locks” for further information.

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st

Press

Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.

the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the When this feature is turned on and the vehicle is

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Refer to “Elec- equipped with the Passive Entry system, using the Pas-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Set- sive Entry system to UNLOCK the vehicle will cause the

tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under- parking lights to flash. The time for this feature is

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center

(EVIC)/Personal

Settings

(Customer-

Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when

the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. When this

Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-

strument Panel” for further information.

feature is turned on and the vehicle is equipped with the To Lock the Doors

Passive Entry system, using the Passive Entry system to Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-

LOCK the vehicle will cause the parking lights to flash. ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and

This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Using the Panic Alarm

“Passive Entry System — If Equipped” under “Door To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold

Locks” for further information.

the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one

second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the

headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse

on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors

are locked with the RKE transmitter, or locked using the

Passive Entry door handle lock button. This feature can The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless

be turned on or turned off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a

Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph

Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In- (24 km/h) or greater.

strument Panel” for further information.

NOTE:

To Unlatch the Trunk

Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two

times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.

•

The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition

switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic

Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and

horn will remain on.

Refer to “Passive Entry System — If Equipped” under

“Door Locks” for further information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

•

You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the 1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of

vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the the Key Fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the

Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted slot and gently pry open the access door.

by the system.

Programming Additional Transmitters

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be

performed at an authorized dealer.

Transmitter Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032

battery.

NOTE:

•

Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

•

Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back

housing or the printed circuit board.

Battery Replacement

1— Battery Access Door

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal

new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause distance, check for these two conditions:

battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with

1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of

rubbing alcohol.

the battery is a minimum of three years.

3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station

opening and snap into place.

tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Key Fob Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine

conveniently from outside the vehicle while

still maintaining security. The system has a

•

This device may not cause harmful interference.

range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).

This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

NOTE:

•

The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic

transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob

may reduce this range.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

How to Use Remote Start

NOTE: With Keyless Go, the remote start feature will

All of the following conditions must be met before the operate with the Start/Stop button installed in the igni-

engine will remote start: tion switch.

•

Shift lever in PARK

WARNING!

Doors closed

•

Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or

confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-

oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-

bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious

injury or death when inhaled.

Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters

away from children. Operation of the Remote Start

System, windows, door locks or other controls

could cause serious injury or death.

Hood closed

Trunk closed

Hazard switch off

Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)

Ignition key removed from ignition switch

Battery at an acceptable charge level

RKE PANIC button not pressed

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Enter Remote Start Mode

To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the

Press and release the REMOTE START button Vehicle

on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec- Press and release the REMOTE START button one time,

onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system

engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the

will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START

Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote

Start request.

NOTE:

•

The park lamps will turn on and remain on during

Remote Start mode.

To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle

Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release

•

For security, power window and power sunroof op- the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock

eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if

in the Remote Start mode.

equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,

insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the

switch to the RUN position.

•

The engine can be started two consecutive times (two

15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,

the ignition switch must be cycled to the RUN position

before you can repeat the start sequence for a third

cycle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

With Passive Entry

DOOR LOCKS

Use the Passive Entry feature to unlock the vehicle, press

the Start/Stop button one time if the Keyless Go Start/

Stop button is installed in the ignition switch, otherwise,

insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn to the

RUN position. Refer to the “Passive Entry System” under

“Door Locks” for more information.

Manual Door Locks

To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each

door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the

door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.

NOTE:

•

For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Go feature, the

ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to

drive the vehicle.

•

For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Go feature, the

message “Insert Key/Turn To On” will display in the

EVIC until you insert the Key Fob. Once inserted, the

message “Turn To On” will display in the EVIC until

you turn the Key Fob to ON.

•

For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go feature, the

message “Push Button/Insert Key” will display in the

EVIC until you push the START button.

Door Lock Plunger

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,

the door will lock. Make sure the key is not inside the

vehicle before closing the door.

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in

the ignition or leave a vehicle with Keyless Go in

the ACC or RUN position. A child could operate

power windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

WARNING!

•

For personal security and safety in the event of an

accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as

well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key

from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-

vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe

personal injuries and death.

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is on each front door trim

panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

the locks to operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in

the ignition OFF or ACC position, a chime will sound as

a reminder to remove the Key Fob.

If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Go, opening the

driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed

in ACC or RUN (engine stopped) will cause the reminder

chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Start-

ing And Operating” for further details.

Automatic Door Locks

The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power

door locks if all of the following conditions are met:

Power Door Lock Switch

1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.

If you press the power door lock switch while the Key

Fob is in the ignition, ACC or RUN position and any front 2. The transmission is in gear.

door is open, the power locks will not operate. This

prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in

3. All doors are closed.

the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob, returning the ignition 4. The throttle is pressed.

mode to the OFF position, or closing the door will allow

5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

6. The doors were not previously locked using the power 2. Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and RUN and

door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) then back to OFF four times ending up in the OFF

transmitter.

position (do not start engine).

Automatic Door Locks Programming

The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or

disabled as follows:

3. Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors.

4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the

programming.

•

For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle

5. Cycle the ignition after performing steps one to four

for the feature to be enabled or disabled.

Information

Center

(EVIC)/Personal

Settings

(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- 6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to

ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. its previous setting.

•

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-

following procedure: dance with local laws.

1. Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit

switch. The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with

power door locks if:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-

abled.

•

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the

following procedure:

2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed 1. Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition.

returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).

2. Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and RUN and

3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.

4. The driver door is opened.

then back to OFF four times ending up in the OFF

position (do not start engine).

3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the

doors.

5. The doors were not previously unlocked.

6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).

4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the

programming.

Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming

The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be

enabled or disabled as follows:

5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to

its previous setting.

•

For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-

mation.

NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature

in accordance with local laws.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Passive Entry System — If Equipped

•

If wearing hand gloves, the Passive Entry door handle

unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower

response time.

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the

vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. This fea-

ture allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)

without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or

unlock buttons.

To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the driver’s side of the vehicle, grab the front

driver door handle to unlock the driver’s door automati-

NOTE:

•

Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF, refer to cally.

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-

tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed

all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front

driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver

Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

•

If a passive entry door handle has not been used for

72 hours the passive entry feature for that handle may

time out. Also, if it has been raining on a passive entry

door handle for 24 hours, that door handle’s passive

entry feature may be deactivated. Pulling the deacti-

vated front door handle will reactivate that door

handle’s passive entry feature.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:

transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft transmitters is detected, the Passive Entry System auto-

(1.5 m) of the passenger side of the vehicle, grab the front matically unlocks ALL vehicle doors and chirps the horn

passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati- three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and

cally.

the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the

vehicle).

NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger

door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door To Enter the Trunk

unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft

Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).

(1.0 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the left side of

CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is

located on the deck lid.

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE

Transmitter In Vehicle

NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive

Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the

deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless

another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-

ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the

deck lid.

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a

Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the

Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door

unlock feature. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the

door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all

open doors have been closed, the vehicle checks the

passenger compartment for any valid Passive Entry RKE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Lock the Vehicle’s Doors

•

The passive entry system will not operate if the RKE

transmitter battery is dead.

The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on

the outside of the handle, with one of the vehicle’s

Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the

driver’s side, press the driver’s door handle LOCK

button to lock all four doors.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE

transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the

vehicle’s interior door panel.

Child Protection Door Lock

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters

within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger side, press the

passenger’s door handle LOCK button to lock all four

doors.

To provide a safer environment for small children riding

in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child

Protection Door Lock system.

To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System

NOTE:

•

After an outside handle lock cycle, the system will not 1. Open the rear door.

allow a passive entry to unlock the same door for two

seconds. However, the RKE unlock function will work

during this time period.

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or similar object)

into the child lock control and pull it upward.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

NOTE: For emergency key information, refer to “A NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is

Word About Your Keys”.

engaged, the door can be opened only by using the

outside door handle even though the inside door lock is

in the unlocked position.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened

from the outside when the child protection locks are

engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in

serious injury or death.

NOTE:

•

After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys-

tem, always test the door from the inside to make

certain it is in the desired position.

Child Lock Control

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

•

For emergency exit with the system engaged, move

the door lock plunger to the UNLOCK position, roll

down the window and open the door with the outside

door handle.

To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock

System

1. Open the rear door.

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or similar object)

into the child lock control and pull it downward.

Child Lock Control

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

NOTE: After disengaging the Child Protection Door

Lock system, always test the door from the inside to

make certain it is in the desired position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

WINDOWS

There are single window controls on each passenger door

trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.

The window controls will operate only when the ignition

switch is in the ON or ACC position.

Power Windows

The window controls on the driver’s door control all the

door windows.

WARNING!

Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the

ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless Go in

the ACC or RUN position. Occupants, particularly

unattended children, can become entrapped by the

windows while operating the power window

switches. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

Power Window Switches

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

AUTO-Down Feature

AUTO-Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If

The driver door power window switch and some model Equipped

passenger door power window switches have an AUTO- Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and

down feature. Press the window switch to the second the window will go up automatically.

detent, release, and the window will go down automati-

To stop the window from going all the way up during the

cally.

AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To open the window part way, press the window switch

To close the window part way, lift the window switch to

to the first detent and release it when you want the

the first detent and release it when you want the window

window to stop.

to stop.

To stop the window from going all the way down during

The power window switches will remain active for up to

the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Open-

The power window switches will remain active for up to ing either front door will cancel this feature. The time for

60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-

time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Elec- Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Set- strument Panel” for further information.

tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

NOTE:

passenger doors. To disable the window controls, press

•

If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- and release the window lockout button (setting it in the

closure, it will reverse direction and then go back DOWN position). To enable the window controls, press

down. Remove the obstacle and use the window and release the window lockout button again (setting it in

switch again to close the window.

the UP position).

•

Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger

the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-

closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the

first detent and hold to close the window manually.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window

is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the

window before closing.

Window Lockout Switch

The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim

panel allows you to disable the window controls on the

Window Lockout Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Reset

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead, rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the AUTO-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the the rear windows open, then open the front and rear

AUTO-up feature, perform the following procedure after windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the

vehicle power is restored:

buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the

sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.

1. Pull the window switch up to close window com-

pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an

additional two seconds after the window is closed.

TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE

The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by

pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the

instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.

2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second

detent to open the window completely and continue to

hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after

the window is fully open.

NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the

button will operate.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

The trunk lid can be released from Refer to “Passive Entry — If Equipped” under “Door

outside the vehicle by pressing the Locks” in this section for more information on trunk

TRUNK button on the Remote operation with the Passive Entry feature.

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter

TRUNK SAFETY WARNING

twice within five seconds.

WARNING!

Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,

either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or

through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the

Trunk Release

Button

trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in

the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,

even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped

in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or

heat stroke.

With the ignition switch in the RUN position, the Trunk

Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster

indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display

will reappear once the trunk is closed.

With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key

removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym-

bol will display until the trunk is closed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Trunk Emergency Release

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency Some of the most important safety features in your

release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid, vehicle are the restraint systems:

near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened

•

Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and

all passengers

trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.

Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-

ger

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)

for the driver and passengers seated next to a window

— if equipped

•

An energy-absorbing steering column and steering

wheel

•

Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants

Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance

occupant protection by managing occupant energy

during an impact event — if equipped

Trunk Emergency Release

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized

seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether

for CHildren (LATCH) feature can be used to hold infant

and child restraint systems. For more information on

LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren

(LATCH).

WARNING!

In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled

up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other

passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.

Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are

buckled up properly.

NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage

inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different

rates of inflation based on the severity and type of

collision.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even

on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver

and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen

far away from home or on your own street.

Please pay close attention to the information in this

section. It tells you how to use your restraint system

properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as

possible.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they

can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown

from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should

be belted at all times.

WARNING!

•

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat

belts are designed to go around the large bones of

your body. These are the strongest parts of your

body and can take the forces of a collision best.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with

lap/shoulder belts.

The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during

very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the

shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under

normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will

lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the

vehicle or being thrown out.

•

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make

your injuries in a collision much worse. You might

suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out

of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to

wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-

sengers safe, too.

Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one

another in a collision, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more

than one person, no matter what their size.

Pulling Out the Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.

Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch

plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt

go around your lap.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and

adjust the front seat.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

WARNING!

•

A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will

not protect you properly. The lap portion could

ride too high on your body, possibly causing

internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the

buckle nearest you.

A belt that is too loose will not protect you

properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far

forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear

your seat belt snugly.

(Continued)

Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug

belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a

collision.

WARNING! (Continued)

•

A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the

vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck

injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause

internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder

bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that

your strongest bones will take the force in a

collision.

A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during a collision. You are more

likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not

wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt

are meant to be used together.

Removing Slack from Belt

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up

a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.

If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to

allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!

•

A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t

be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across

your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as

possible and keep it snug.

A twisted belt can’t do its job properly. In a

collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the

belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in

your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer

immediately and have it fixed.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do

not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they

have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,

etc.).

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor

will withdraw any slack in the belt.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will

In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average

can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt you will prefer a higher position. When you release the

away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that

above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it it is locked in position.

up or down to the position that fits you best.

In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to

position the belt away from your neck.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/

shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the

anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,

grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a

fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

latch plate.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the

the entire belt is extracted.

folded webbing.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will

Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If

hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is

Equipped

now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-

locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail- Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it

able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina- to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

tion lap/shoulder belt.

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)

locking mode.

When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode

Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped

seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with The seat belts for both front seating positions may be

this feature. Children 12 years old and younger should equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to

always be properly restrained in the rear seat.

remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.

These devices improve the performance of the seat belt

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the

in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, warning is triggered, BeltAlert௡ will continue to chime

including those in child restraints.

and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or

until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is buckled.

BeltAlert௡ will be reactivated if the driver’s or passen-

ger’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and

the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat

belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be

worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-

ers are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a

deployed airbag, must be replaced immediately.

For front passenger seats equipped with BeltAlert, your

vehicle is equipped to detect when it is occupied. The

BeltAlert௡ warning system is not activated when the

front passenger seat is unoccupied. The BeltAlert௡ warn-

ing system may be triggered when an animal or heavy

object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlertா)

If the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with belt folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be

alert) seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers

starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly

than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System stowed.

(BeltAlert௡) will alert the driver or front passenger to

buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

BeltAlert௡ Programming

3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the

The BeltAlert௡ can be enabled or disabled by your RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s

authorized dealer or by performing the following steps: seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending

with the seat belt buckled.

NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de-

activating the BeltAlert௡.

NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn

on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while

re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract

the seat belt.

1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any

position except RUN or START, buckle the driver’s seat

belt.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single

chime will sound to signify that you have successfully

completed the programming.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position, but do

not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light

to turn off and then proceed to the next step.

BeltAlert௡ can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

NOTE: You must perform the following steps within

60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the RUN NOTE: Although BeltAlert௡ has been deactivated, the

position.

Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as

long as the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

Seat Belts and Pregnant Women

WARNING!

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts

throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is

the best way to keep the baby safe.

Using a seat belt extender when not needed can

increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use

when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn

low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-

tions. Remove and store the extender when not

needed.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt

across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.

Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the

abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take

the force if there is a collision.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the

driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat

belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air-

bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the

instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The

words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and

when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so

equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized

dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This

extender should be used only if the existing belt is not

long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-

tender and store it.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator

design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of

inflation based on the severity and type of collision.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front

passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the

inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon

seat position.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front

passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether

the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The

seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the

Advanced Front Airbags.

Front Airbag Components

1 — Airbags

This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental

Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the

driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win-

dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they

are located above the side windows and their covers are

also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.

2 — Knee Bolsters

NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal

regulations for Advanced Airbags.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

NOTE:

•

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)

•

Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;

but they will open during airbag deployment.

Front and Side Impact Sensors

Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,

and Seat Track Position Sensors

•

After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an

authorized dealer immediately.

Advanced Front Airbag Features

Airbag System Components

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag

system components:

The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver

and front passenger airbags. This system provides output

appropriate to the severity and type of collision as

determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),

which may receive information from the front impact

sensors.

•

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

Airbag Warning Light

Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an

impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of

the second stage determines whether the output force is

low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet

the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.

Knee Impact Bolster

Driver Advanced Front Airbag

Passenger Advanced Front Airbag

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster

such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,

etc.

•

No objects should be placed over or near the

airbag on the instrument panel, because any such

objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a

collision severe enough to cause the airbag to

inflate.

Do not put anything on or around the airbag

covers or attempt to open them manually. You may

damage the airbags and you could be injured

because the airbags may no longer be functional.

The protective covers for the airbag cushions are

designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-

ing.

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain

(SABIC) — If Equipped

SABIC airbags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover

protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in

addition to that provided by the body structure. Each

airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the

head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential

for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-

ward, covering both windows on the impact side.

•

Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in

any way.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both

front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy

the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag

occupant protection.

WARNING!

•

If your vehicle is equipped with left and right

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain

(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up

high enough to block the location of the SABIC.

The area where the side curtain airbag is located

should remain free from any obstructions.

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects

between you and the side airbags; the performance

could be adversely affected and/or objects could

be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)

NOTE:

•

Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners

and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle

may deploy.

•

Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;

but they will open during airbag deployment.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Knee Impact Bolsters

WARNING!

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the

driver and the front passenger, and position front occu-

pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front

Airbags.

Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER

ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger

Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can

cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-

tion.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front

Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved

protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags

also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat

belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be

secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-

positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use

child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should

ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow

children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under

their arm.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the

risk of harm from a deploying airbag:

Children 12 years old and younger should always ride

buckled up in a rear seat.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified

seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer

as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. Center. Phone numbers are provided under ЉIf You Need

(Refer to “Child Restraints”)

AssistanceЉ.

You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

WARNING!

•

Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belts even though you have

airbags.

All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul-

der belts properly.

The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front

Airbags room to inflate.

(Continued)

Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle

has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags

will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the

door.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air-

bags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners —

if equipped, as required, depending on the severity and

type of impact.

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment

could cause serious injury, including death. Air-

bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably

extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or

instrument panel.

Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean

against the door or window. Sit upright in the

center of the seat.

Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi-

tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in

certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and

type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-

pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover

collisions.

The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal

collisions, including some that may produce substantial

vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,

truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other

hand, depending on the type and location of impact,

Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with

little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe

initial deceleration.

Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system

required for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or

side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.

Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side The ORC contains a backup power supply system that

airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or

of collision.

it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over

time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not

good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have

deployed.

Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning

Light in the instrument panel for approxi-

mately six to eight seconds for a self-check

when the ignition is first turned on. After the

self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the

ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it

turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily

or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-

sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,

away from an inflating airbag.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.

the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-

START or RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position,

in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbag

system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.

ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is

noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics

also record the nature of the malfunction.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to

their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70

milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to

blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while

helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-

ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to

protect you in a collision. If the light does not come

on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes

on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right

away by an authorized dealer.

The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the

vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the

airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain

(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped

Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units

The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are

located in the center of the steering wheel and the right

side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a

collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags, it signals

the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is

generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Differ-

ent airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the

collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim

cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel

During collisions where the impact is confined to a

particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may

deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on the severity and

type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the

SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.

A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side

curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes

the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms Enhanced Accident Response System

(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if

eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted the communication network remains intact, and the

and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area power remains intact, depending on the nature of the

where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially event the ORC will determine whether to have the

applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-

3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.

ing functions:

Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,

vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of

whether or not an airbag should have deployed.

•

Cut off fuel to the engine.

Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or

until the ignition key is turned off.

NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC

airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.

•

Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as

the battery has power, until the ignition key is re-

moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using

the Keyless Go Start/Stop button.

Front and Side Impact Sensors

In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the

ORC in determining appropriate response to impact

events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the

level of airbag deployment and provide verification.

•

Unlock the doors automatically.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If a Deployment Occurs

The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately

after deployment.

•

As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like

particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the

process that generates the non-toxic gas used for

airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate

the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye

irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or

throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation

continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on

your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-

structions for cleaning.

NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all

collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with

the airbag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any

or all of the following may occur:

•

The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-

sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-

passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the

abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those airbags will not be in place to protect you.

you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium

floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.

They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.

However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a

few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor

immediately.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!

Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot

protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,

seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat

belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized

dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.

•

Modifications to any part of the airbag system

could cause it to fail when you need it. You could

be injured if the airbag system is not there to

protect you. Do not modify the components or

wiring, including adding any kind of badges or

stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the

upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not

modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,

or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the

airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who

works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.

•

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Airbag Warning Light

You will want to have the airbags ready to

inflate for your protection in a collision. While

the airbag system is designed to be mainte-

nance free, if any of the following occurs, have

an authorized dealer service the system immediately.

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-

vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate

accidentally or may not function properly if modi-

fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-

rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-

vice. If your seat, including your trim cover and

cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ-

ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-

ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized

dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-

ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the

airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact

your authorized dealer.

•

The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for

approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition

switch is first placed into the RUN position.

•

The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the ap-

proximate six to eight-second interval.

The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine NOTE:

related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint 1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-

not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag

check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label deployment.

located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the

2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be

proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the

recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).

fuse is good.

In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be

In the event of a collision, your vehicle is designed to

used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more

record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-

about the possible causes of crashes and associated

eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the

injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-

moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if

mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by

applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-

Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be re-

speed deceleration data or change in velocity during

quested by customers, insurance carriers, government

and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.

officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those

EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or

associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-

nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.

ance organizations.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

In the event that an investigation is undertaken by 1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data

Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com- with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,

pany or its designated representative will first obtain provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter

permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the preserved.

vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before

2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler

accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to

Group LLC product.

image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,

pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.

provided to the custodial entity upon request. General

data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes

4. Otherwise required by law.

may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash Data parameters that are recorded:

databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-

•

Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for

electronically-controlled safety systems, including the

airbag system

ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive

nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-

hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential

data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any

third party except when:

•

Vehicle speed

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

•

Engine RPM

WARNING!

Brake switch status

Pedal position

In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,

can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force

required to hold even an infant on your lap could

become so great that you could not hold the child, no

matter how strong you are. The child and others

could be badly injured. Any child riding in your

vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s

size.

And other parameters depending on vehicle

configuration

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the

time, including babies and children. Every state in the

United States and all Canadian provinces require that

small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the

law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for

children from newborn size to the child almost large

enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child

seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat

for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your

child.

Children 12 years and younger should ride properly

buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash

statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seats rather than in the front.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Infants and Child Restraints

WARNING!

•

Safety experts recommend that children ride

rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least

one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types

of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant

carriers and convertible child seats.

Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in

the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger

airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag

deployment could cause severe injury or death to

infants in this position.

•

The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the

vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up

to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be

used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the

vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher

weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than

infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing

by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are

less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are

held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the

LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to

“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower

Anchors and Tether for CHildren)”.

Older Children and Child Restraints

Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are

older than one year can ride forward-facing in the

vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child

seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children

who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older

than one year. These child seats are also held in the

vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child

restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child

Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for

CHildren)”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing

more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit

the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit

with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the

child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a

belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-

positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the

lap/shoulder belt.

•

Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or

slouching can move the belt out of position.

If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the

child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a

child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind

their back.

NOTE:

For additional information, refer to

www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-

dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-

site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm

Children Too Large for Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt

comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend

over the front of the seat when their back is against the

seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

•

Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug

as possible.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Standards. We also recommend that you make sure

that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle

where you will use it before you buy it.

WARNING!

•

Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a

collision. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-

actly when installing an infant or child restraint.

A rearward-facing child restraint should only be

used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-

straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-

ing passenger airbag, which may cause severe or

fatal injury to the infant.

•

The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s

weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for

weight and height limits.

Carefully follow the instructions that come with the

restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may

not work when you need it.

•

Buckle the child into the seat according to the child

restraint manufacturer’s directions.

When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the

vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.

Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or

collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and

cause serious personal injury.

Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child

restraint:

•

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it

has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower

Anchors and Tether for CHildren)

connection to the top tether anchorages, have been

available for some time. For some older child restraints,

Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether

restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH strap kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage

system provides for the installation of the child restraint of all the available attachments provided with your child

without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing restraint in any vehicle.

the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper

All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages

tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle

that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible

structure.

child seats. You should NEVER install LATCH-

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail- compatible child seats so that two seats share a common

able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent

introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not

having attachments for those anchorages will continue to LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehi-

have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat cle’s seat belts.

belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that

are provided with the child restraint system.

The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars

located at the rear of the seat cushion where it

meets the seatback and are just visible when

you lean into the rear seat to install the child

restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger

along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion

surfaces.

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages

behind each rear seating position located in the

panel between the rear seatback and the rear

window. These tether strap anchorages are

under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.

LATCH Anchorages

Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

System

We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions

carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all

child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with

separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or

connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward- NOTE:

facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant

restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a

hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a

means of adjusting the tension of the strap.

•

Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the

opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in

the strap.

•

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a

child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not

being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out

of reach of children. It is recommended that before

installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the

seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of

reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child

restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt

behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through

the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This

should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an

inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle

that the seat belts are not toys and should not be

played with, and never leave your child unattended in

the vehicle.

You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and

on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the

hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,

attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the

seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage

cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the

child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor-

age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the

most direct path between the anchor and the child

restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the

child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,

removing slack in the straps according to the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in

order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed.

Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”. A locking clip

should not be necessary once the automatic locking

feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on

the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is

activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all

of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing the

webbing to retract back into the retractor. Tighten web-

bing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by de-

pressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract into

the retractor.

WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or

child restraint. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly

when installing an infant or child restraint.

Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat

Belts

The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-

ing latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs),

which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around

the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a

locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the

lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch

plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt

system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-

ally and pull it tight if necessary.

In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the

lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the

buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening

on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the

buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times

to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the

release button facing out.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and

pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need

to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from

the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch

plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the

child restraint secure, try a different seating position.

To attach a child restraint tether strap:

1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the

seat where you are placing the child restraint.

Tether Strap Mounting

1 — Cover

3 — Attaching Strap

A — Tether Strap Hook

B — Tether Anchor

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path

for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to Transporting Pets

the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly

tions.

injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in

a collision.

NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the

opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses

the strap.

or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and

drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the

child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind

the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether

strap.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or

55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the

limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-

mental and should be avoided.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a

high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil

changes should be consistent with anticipated climate

conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For

the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to

“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-

hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL

OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

WARNING!

•

Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

•

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few

thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be

considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-

preted as an indication of difficulty.

•

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas

If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,

make sure that all windows are closed and the climate

control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT

use the recirculation mode.

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)

follow these safety tips:

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust

system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the

vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,

damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open

seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes

to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined

areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or

out of the area.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine

running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force

outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the

Vehicle

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place

the blower control on high speed. You should be able to

feel the air directed against the windshield. See your

authorized dealer for service if your defroster is

inoperable.

Seat Belts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,

frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced

immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a

collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after

a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,

torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt

or retractor condition, replace the belt.

Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of

your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal

area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that

they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the

pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other

ways.

Airbag Warning Light

The light should come on and remain on for four to eight

seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first

turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your

authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes

on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-

rized dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-

ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that

have been removed for cleaning.

Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the

driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.

Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal

and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle

control.

If required, mounting posts must be properly

installed, if not equipped from the factory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or

mounting can cause interference with the brake

pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss

of control of the vehicle.

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of

vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-

sonal injury.

•

Always make sure that floor mats are properly

attached to the floor mat fasteners.

•

Never place or install floor mats or other floor

coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly

secured to prevent them from moving and inter-

fering with the pedals or the ability to control the

vehicle.

•

Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on

top of already installed floor mats. Additional

floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size

of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Door Latches

the Vehicle

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Tires

Fluid Leaks

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,

patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline

lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or

cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be

Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.

located and corrected immediately.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights

while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high

beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Ⅵ Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 93

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . 91

▫ Tilt Mirror In Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

▫ Things You Should Know About Your

Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Ⅵ Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 122

▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless

Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 122

▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Ⅵ Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

▫ Power Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

▫ Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

▫ Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Ⅵ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 135

▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . 136

▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With

Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Ⅵ To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Ⅵ Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

▫ Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 144

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87

▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Ⅵ Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column

— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Ⅵ Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Ⅵ Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . 146

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Ⅵ Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 148

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Ⅵ Parksense௡ Rear Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

▫ Parksense௡ System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 160

▫ Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Ⅵ Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Ⅵ Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Ⅵ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Ⅵ Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 164

▫ Programming HomeLink௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 168

▫ Using HomeLink௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink௡

Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Ⅵ Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89

▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Ⅵ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Ⅵ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Ⅵ Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

▫ Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS

Automatic Dimming Mirror

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare

from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or

off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light

next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the

dimming feature is activated.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never

spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the

mirror clean.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91

Outside Mirrors

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The

to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to

overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.

resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full

forward, full rearward and normal.

NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will

give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror

lane next to your vehicle. The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for

glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled

by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be

turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the

inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for

headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away

than they really are. Relying too much on your

passenger side convex mirror could cause you to

collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your

inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a

vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Tilt Mirror in Reverse

The Tilt Mirror in Reverse feature tilts the outside rear-

view mirrors downward when the ignition is placed in

the RUN position and the transmission is in REVERSE.

This feature provides the driver with a better view of the

ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when

backing up. The mirrors will move back to their previous

position when the transmission is shifted out of RE-

VERSE.

The Tilt Mirror in Reverse feature can be enabled or

disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-

tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

Power Mirror Control

After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same

direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off

position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror

Power Mirrors

The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door position.

trim panel, next to the power door lock switch. A rotary

knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory

Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter or the MEMORY switch on the driver-side

door trim panel to return the power mirrors to pre-

programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”

in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for

further information.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear

window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in

“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further

information.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors

Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-

An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-

To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular

swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ЉCall” ѧ

automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light. “Mike” ѧ”WorkЉ or ЉDial” ѧ “248-555-1212Љ). Your cellular

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between

audio system; the system will automatically mute your the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit

radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.

your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s

microphone for private conversation.

NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a cellular phone

equipped with the Bluetooth௡ ЉHands-Free Profile,Љ Ver- The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your

sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for Bluetooth௡ “Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone.

supported phones.

Uconnect™ features Bluetooth௡ technology - the global

standard that enables different electronic devices to con-

nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so

Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your

cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as

long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to

the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone

allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the

system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be

used with the system at a time. The system is available in

English, Spanish, or French languages.

For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following

websites:

•

www.chrysler.com/uconnect

www.dodge.com/uconnect

www.jeep.com/uconnect

or call 1–877–855–8400

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95

The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free

Profile certified Bluetooth௡ cellular phone. See the

Uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellu-

lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset

Profile) you may not be able to use any Uconnect™

Phone features. Refer to your cellular service provider or

the phone manufacturer for details.

WARNING!

Any voice commanded system should be used only

in safe driving conditions following local laws and

phone use. All attention should be kept on the

roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an

accident causing serious injury or death.

The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-

cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone

can be adjusted either from the radio volume control

knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right

switch), if so equipped.

Uconnect™ Phone Button

Depending on the vehicle options, either the

radio or the mirror will contain the two control

buttons

(Voice Command button) that will en-

able you to access the system.

(Uconnect™ Phone button) and

The radio display will be used for visual prompts from

the Uconnect™ Phone such as ЉCELLЉ or caller ID on

certain radios.

Voice Command Button

Actual button location may vary with the ra-

dio. The individual buttons are described in the

“Operation” section.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Operation

example, you can use the combined form voice com-

mand ЉPhonebook New Entry,Љ or you can break the

combined form command into two voice commands:

ЉPhonebookЉ and ЉNew Entry.Љ Please remember, the

Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a

normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone

sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™

Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone

menu structure. Voice commands are required after most

Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a

specific command and then guided through the available

options.

•

Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for Voice Command Tree

the beep, which follows the ЉReadyЉ prompt or another Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.

prompt.

Help Command

•

For certain operations, compound commands can be If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to

used. For example, instead of saying ЉSetupЉ and then know your options at any prompt, say ЉHelpЉ following

ЉPhone Pairing,Љ the following compound command the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play all the options

can be said: ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ

at any prompt if you ask for help.

•

For each feature explanation in this section, only the To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press

combined form of the voice command is given. You the

button and follow the audible prompts for

can also break the commands into parts and say each

part of the command when you are asked for it. For

directions. All Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a

press of the

button on the radio control head.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97

Cancel Command

•

When prompted, after the beep, say ЉPair a PhoneЉ and

follow the audible prompts.

At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ЉCancelЉ and

you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a

few instances the system will take you back to the

previous menu.

You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-

fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to

enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any

four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN

after the initial pairing process.

Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone to a Cellular Phone

To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair

your compatible Bluetooth௡ enabled cellular phone.

•

For identification purposes, you will be prompted to

give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your cellular

phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be

given a unique phone name.

To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-

ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The

Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-

tions for pairing.

You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a

priority level between one and seven, with one being

the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular

phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any

given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,

connected to your Uconnect™ Phone. The priority

allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which cellular

The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone

pairing instructions:

•

Press the

button to begin.

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the

vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three

and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the

Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three cellular

phone when you make a call. You can select to use a

lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to

ЉAdvanced Phone ConnectivityЉ in this section).

•

The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number

and then dial. The number will appear in the display

of certain radios.

Call by Saying a Name

•

Press the

button to begin.

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

“Call.Љ

Dial by Saying a Number

•

Press the

button to begin.

•

The system will prompt you to say the name of the

person you want to call.

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉDial.Љ

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

the name of the person you want to call. For example,

you can say ЉJohn Doe,Љ where John Doe is a previ-

ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook

or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a

name in the phonebook, refer to ЉAdd Names to Your

Uconnect™ Phonebook,Љ in the phonebook.

•

The system will prompt you to say the number you

want to call.

For example, you can say Љ234-567-8901Љ.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99

•

The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and

then dial the corresponding phone number, which

may appear in the display of certain radios.

•

When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,

ЉHome,Љ ЉWork,Љ ЉMobile,Љ or ЉPagerЉ). This will allow

you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook

entry, if desired.

Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook

When prompted, recite the phone number for the

phonebook entry that you are adding.

NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is

recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.

After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-

book, you will be given the opportunity to add more

phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the

main menu.

•

Press the

button to begin.

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉPhonebook New Entry.Љ

The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32

names in the phonebook with each name having up to

four associated phone numbers and designations. Each

language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible

only in that language. In addition, if equipped and

supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati-

cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.

•

When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of

long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-

mended. For example, say ЉRobert SmithЉ or ЉRobertЉ

instead of ЉBob.Љ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook

Transfer From Cellular Phone

•

Depending on the maximum number of entries down-

loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest

downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-

able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available

for use.

If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,

Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text

names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s

phonebook. Specific Bluetooth௡ Phones with Phone Book

Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™

website for supported phones.

•

Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu-

lar phone is accessible.

Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.

SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-

book.

•

To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect™)

Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a

Name” section.

•

This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or

deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be

edited on the cellular phone. The changes are trans-

ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next

phone connection.

•

Automatic download and update, if supported, begins

as soon as the Bluetooth௡ wireless phone connection is

made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you

start the vehicle.

•

A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-

loaded and updated every time a phone is connected

to the Uconnect™ Phone.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101

Phonebook Download — Single Entry

first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth௡ connection to

the Uconnect™ Phone, and then send the address

book entry via Bluetooth௡. Please see your phone

Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to

drop the Bluetooth௡ connection.

If equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™

Phone allows the user to download entries from their

phone via Bluetooth௡. To use this feature, press the

button and say “Phonebook Download.” The system

prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via

Bluetooth௡…” The system is now ready to accept phone-

book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth௡

Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone

Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send

these entries from your phone.

•

If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it

will only use the first 24 characters.

Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries

NOTE:

•

Editing names in the phonebook is recommended

when the vehicle is not in motion.

NOTE:

•

The phone handset must support Bluetooth௡ OBEX

transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.

Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be

deleted or edited.

•

Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they

are already connected to any system via Bluetooth௡,

and you may see a message on the phone display that

the Bluetooth௡ link is busy. In this case, the user must

•

Press the

button to begin.

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉPhonebook Edit.Љ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry

entry that you wish to edit.

NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended

Next, choose the number designation (home, work, when the vehicle is not in motion.

cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.

•

Press the

button to begin.

When prompted, recite the new phone number for the

phonebook entry that you are editing.

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉPhonebook Delete.Љ

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,

you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in

the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return

to the main menu.

•

After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will

then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish

to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook

entry that you wish to delete or you can say ЉList

NamesЉ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook

from which you choose. To select one of the entries

ЉPhonebook EditЉ can be used to add another phone

number to a name entry that already exists in the

phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a

cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John

Doe’s” work number later using the ЉPhonebook EditЉ

feature.

from the list, press the

button while the

Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say

ЉDelete.Љ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103

•

After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will

ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,

work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you

wish to delete.

•

Note that only the phonebook in the current language

is deleted.

Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be

deleted or edited.

•

Note that only the phonebook entry in the current

language is deleted.

List All Names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook

•

Press the

button to begin.

Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be

deleted or edited.

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉPhonebook List Names.Љ

Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries

•

The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the

phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-

book entries, if available.

•

Press the

button to begin.

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉPhonebook Erase All.Љ

To call one of the names in the list, press the

button during the playing of the desired name, and

say ЉCall.Љ

•

The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you

wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.

After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be

deleted.

NOTE: The user can also exercise ЉEditЉ or ЉDeleteЉ

operations at this point.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the call, press and hold the

number designation you wish to call.

button until you hear a

single beep, indicating that the incoming call was

rejected.

•

The selected number will be dialed.

Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call

Currently in Progress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another

incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for

call waiting that you normally hear when using your

cellular phone. Press the

call on hold and answer the incoming call.

Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the

Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your

cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service

plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be

accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with

your cellular service provider for the features that you

have.

button to place the current

NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the

market today do not support rejecting an incoming call

when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can

only answer an incoming call or ignore it.

Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call

Currently in Progress

When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the

Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-

tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the

call. Press the

button to accept the call. To reject the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

Making a Second Call While Current Call is in

Progress

indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls

have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a

To make a second call while you are currently on a call, time.

press the

button and say ЉDialЉ or ЉCallЉ followed

Conference Call

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on

hold), press and hold the

double beep indicating that the two calls have been

joined into one conference call.

by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to

call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is

in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ЉToggling

Between CallsЉ in this section. To combine two calls, refer

to ЉConference CallЉ in this section.

button until you hear a

Three-Way Calling

To initiate three-way calling, press the

while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,

as described under ЉMaking a Second Call While Current

Call is in Progress.Љ After the second call has established,

Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold

To put a call on hold, press the

a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To

bring the call back from hold, press and hold the

button until you hear a single beep.

button

button until you hear

press and hold the

button until you hear a double

Toggling Between Calls

beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), one conference call.

press the button until you hear a single beep,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Call Termination

Call Continuation

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the

button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if

there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.

If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call

on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell

phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press

Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the

Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been

switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-

able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

•

After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can

continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call

ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates

cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and

transfer of the call to the cellular phone.

and hold the

button until you hear a single beep.

Redial

•

Press the

button to begin.

•

After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can

continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura-

tion, after which the call is automatically transferred

from the Uconnect™ Phone to the cellular phone.

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉRedial.Љ

•

The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that

was dialed from your cellular phone.

An active call is automatically transferred to the

cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to

OFF.

NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the

Uconnect™ Phone.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

Uconnect™ Phone Features

Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is

reachable:

Language Selection

To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is

using:

•

Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency

number for your area.

•

Press the

button to begin.

If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is

operational, you may reach the emergency number as

follows:

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

the name of the language you wish to switch to

English, Espanol, or Francais.

•

Press the

button to begin.

•

Continue to follow the system prompts to complete

the language selection.

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉEmergencyЉ and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct

the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-

ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and

Mexico.

After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and

voice commands will be in that language.

NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change

operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-

book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-

specific and usable across all languages.

NOTE:

The emergency number dialed is based on the country

where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and

•

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may Towing Assistance

not be applicable with the available cellular service If you need towing assistance:

and area.

•

Press the

button to begin.

•

If supported, this number may be programmable on

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉTowing Assistance.Љ

some systems. To do this, press the

button and

say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.

NOTE:

•

The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your

chances of successfully making a phone call as to that

for the cellular phone directly.

The towing assistance number dialed is based on the

country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-

2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-

3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside

Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour

ЉTowing AssistanceЉ coverage details on the DVD in

the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour

Towing Assistance references.

WARNING!

Your phone must be turned on and paired to the

Uconnect™ Phone System to allow use of this vehicle

feature in emergency situations, when the cellular

phone has network coverage and stays paired to the

Uconnect™ Phone System.

•

If supported, this number may be programmable on

some systems. To do this, press the

button and

say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

Paging

When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that

To learn how to page, refer to ЉWorking with Automated normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence

Systems.Љ Paging works properly except for pagers of on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the

certain companies, which time out a little too soon to

work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.

button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed

by the word ЉSend.Љ For example, if required to enter

your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can

Voice Mail Calling

To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ЉWorking

with Automated Systems.Љ

press the

button and say, Љ3 7 4 6 # Send.Љ Saying

a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ЉSend,Љ is

also to be used for navigating through an automated

customer service center menu structure, and to leave a

number on a pager.

Working with Automated Systems

This method is used in instances where one generally has

to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while

navigating through an automated telephone system.

You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries

as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager

entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to

You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice

mail system or an automated service, such as a paging

service or automated customer service line. Some ser-

vices require immediate response selection. In some

instances, that may be too quick for use of the

Uconnect™ Phone.

call and then press the

button and say, “Send.” The

system will prompt you to enter the name or number and

say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF

phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system

tones over the phone.

from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™

Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).

NOTE:

•

You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone

network configurations. This is normal.

•

Press the

button to begin.

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉSetup Confirmations.Љ The Uconnect™ Phone will

play the current confirmation prompt status and you

will be given the choice to change it.

•

Some paging and voice mail systems have system time

out settings that are too short and may not allow the

use of this feature.

Barge In - Overriding Prompts

Phone and Network Status Indicators

The “Voice Command” button can be used when you

wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice

command immediately. For example, if a prompt is

asking ЉWould you like to pair a phone, clear a...,Љ you

If available on the radio and/or on a premium display

such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by

your cellular phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide

notification to inform you of your phone and network

status when you are attempting to make a phone call

could press the

button and say, ЉPair a PhoneЉ to

select that option without having to listen to the rest of using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for roaming,

the voice prompt. network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)

You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be

keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing able to hear the conversation coming from the other

via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In

caution and take precautionary safety measures). By order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:

dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth௡ cellular

•

Press the

button.

phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s

audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same

as if you dial the number using Voice Command.

Following the beep, say ЉMute.Љ

In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:

NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send

the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the

vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this

situation, after successfully dialing a number the user

may feel that the call did not go through even though the

call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will

hear the audio.

•

Press the

button.

Following the beep, say ЉMute off.Љ

Advanced Phone Connectivity

Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone

The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-

ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect™ Phone

without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

from your Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular phone to the

•

When prompted, say ЉList Phones.Љ

Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the

button

The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of

all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to

the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired

and say ЉTransfer Call.Љ

Connect or Disconnect Link Between the

Uconnect™ Phone and Cellular Phone

phone being announced, press the

button and

Your cellular phone can be paired with many different

electronic devices, but can only be actively ЉconnectedЉ

with one electronic device at a time.

say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sec-

tions for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a

paired phone.

If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth௡ Select Another Cellular Phone

connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular This feature allows you to select and start using another

phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.

described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.

•

Press the

button to begin.

List Paired Cellular Phone Names

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉSetup Select PhoneЉ and follow the prompts.

•

Press the

button to begin.

After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Setup Phone Pairing.”

•

You can also press the

the list is being played, and then choose the phone that

you wish to select.

button at any time while

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

•

The selected phone will be used for the next phone Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™

call. If the selected phone is not available, the Phone

Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest

priority phone present in or near (approximately

To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the

within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.

Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial

button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”

Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Cellular Phones

Voice Training

•

Press the

button to begin.

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-

nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™

Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this

training mode, follow one of the two following proce-

After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say

ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ

•

At the next prompt, say ЉDeleteЉ and follow the dures:

prompts.

From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from

button at any time while radio mode):

You can also press the

the list is being played, and then choose the phone you

wish to delete.

•

Press and hold the

the session begins, or,

button for five seconds until

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

Press the

TrainingЉ command.

button and say the ЉSetup, Voice

•

Always wait for the beep before speaking.

Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would

speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from

you.

Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the

Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the Voice Training

session should be completed when the vehicle is parked

with the engine running, all windows closed, and the

blower fan switched off.

•

Make sure that no one other than you is speaking

during a Voice Command period.

Performance is maximized under:

This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The

system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

•

low-to-medium blower setting,

low-to-medium vehicle speed,

low road noise,

To restore the Voice Command system to factory default

settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above

procedure and follow the prompts.

smooth road surface,

Voice Command

fully closed windows,

dry weather condition.

•

For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to

provide at least ¹⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead

console (if equipped) and the mirror.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

•

Even though the system is designed for users speaking

in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-

cents, the system may not always work for some.

•

Even though international dialing for most number

combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing

number combinations may not be supported.

When navigating through an automated system such

as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of

speaking the digit string, make sure to say ЉSend.Љ

In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be

compromised with the convertible top down.

Phone Far End Audio Performance

Audio quality is maximized under:

•

Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is

not in motion is recommended.

•

low-to-medium blower setting,

low-to-medium vehicle speed,

low road noise,

It is not recommended to store similar sounding

names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.

Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo-

cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the

entries are not similar.

smooth road surface,

fully closed windows,

•

Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must

be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.

dry weather conditions, and

operation from the driver’s seat.

You can say ЉOЉ (letter ЉOЉ) for Љ0Љ (zero).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness Power-Up

to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the

not the Uconnect™ Phone.

ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you

must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.

•

Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced

by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.

In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be

compromised with the convertible top down.

Bluetooth௡ Communication Link

Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to

the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connec-

tion can generally be reestablished by switching the

phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to

remain in Bluetooth௡ ON mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Commands

Alternate(s)

Primary

zero

Alternate(s)

Primary

call

one

cancel

two

three

four

confirmation prompts

continue

delete

five

dial

six

seven

eight

download

edit

emergency

English

nine

star (*)

plus (+)

pound (#)

add location

all

erase all

Espanol

Francais

help

home

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

Voice Commands

Alternate(s)

Voice Commands

Primary

Alternate(s)

language

list names

list phones

mobile

redial

return to main menu

select phone

send

return or main menu

select

mute

set up

phone settings or phone

set up

mute off

new entry

towing assistance

transfer call

Uconnect™ Tutorial

try again

voice training

work

pager

pair a phone

phone pairing

phonebook

record again

pairing

phone book

yes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-

following conditions:

mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a

raised voice level.

•

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

WARNING!

Any voice commanded system should be used only

in safe driving conditions following local laws and

phone use. All attention should be kept on the

roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an

accident causing serious injury or death.

•

This device may not cause harmful interference.

This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED

When you press the Voice Command

button, you

will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a

command.

Voice Command System Operation

This Voice Command system allows you to

control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc

player, and a memo recorder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are

seconds, the system will present you with a list of listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the

options.

disc menu or from the FM radio menu.

If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists When using this system, you should speak clearly and at

options, press the Voice Command

for the beep, and say your command.

button, listen a normal speaking volume.

The system will best recognize your speech if the win-

dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is

set to low.

Pressing the Voice Command

button while the

system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system

will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or

change commands. This will become helpful once you

start to learn the options.

At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your

commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.

To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice

NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,

“Help” or “Main Menu”.

Command

button and say “Help” or “Main

Menu”.

These commands are universal and can be used from any

menu. All other commands can be used depending upon

the active application.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Commands

In this mode, you can say the following commands:

The Voice Command system understands two types of

commands. Universal commands are available at all

times. Local commands are available if the supported

radio mode is active.

•

“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)

“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)

“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)

“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)

Changing the Volume

1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command

button.

Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium

Wave — If Equipped)

To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In

this mode, you may say the following commands:

2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).

3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the

volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command

system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for

Voice Command is different than the audio system.

•

“Frequency” (to change the frequency)

“Next Station” (to select the next station)

“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)

“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

Main Menu

Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command

button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main

menu.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

Radio FM

•

“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)

To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In

this mode, you may say the following commands:

“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)

“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)

“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)

“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

•

“Frequency” (to change the frequency)

“Next Station” (to select the next station)

“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)

“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

Disc

To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you

may say the following commands:

Satellite Radio

•

“Track” (#) (to change the track)

To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite

Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-

mands:

“Next Track” (to play the next track)

“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)

“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

•

“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its

spoken number)

“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Memo

−

“Previous” (to play the previous memo)

“Delete” (to delete a memo)

To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In

this mode, you may say the following commands:

•

“Delete All” (to delete all memos)

•

“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the

recording, you may press the Voice Command

button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of

the following commands:

System Setup

To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you

may say the following commands:

•

“Language German”

“Language Dutch”

“Language Italian”

“Language English”

“Language French”

“Language Spanish”

“Tutorial”

−

“Save” (to save the memo)

“Continue” (to continue recording)

“Delete” (to delete the recording)

•

“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)

— During the playback you may press the Voice

Command

button to stop playing memos. You

proceed by saying one of the following commands:

−

“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)

“Voice Training”

“Next” (to play the next memo)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice SEATS

Command

button first and wait for the beep Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System

of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe

operation of the vehicle.

before speaking the “Barge In” commands.

Voice Training

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-

nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™

Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.

WARNING!

•

DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas

are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

1. Press the Voice Command

button, say “System

Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice

Training.” This will train your own voice to the system

and will improve recognition.

2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by

Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”

session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,

engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan

switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new

user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Seats

WARNING!

The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat

near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat

up or down, forward or rearward, or to recline the

seatback. The passenger’s seat will move up or down,

forward or rearward.

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is

dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could

cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be

properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust

the seat only while the vehicle is parked.

CAUTION!

DO NOT place any article under a power seat or

impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to

the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if

movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s

path.

Power Seat Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

Power Reclining Seats

The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the

seat.

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and

be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner

only when the vehicle is parked.

Power Seat Recline Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lumbar Support

Head Restraints

This feature allows you to increase or decrease the Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event

amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever for- of a rear impact. The head restraint should be adjusted so

ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired the top of the head restraint is located above the top of

amount of lumbar support.

your ear.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the large

button, located on the base of the head restraint, and

push downward on the head restraint.

Lumbar Support Control Lever

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

Adjustable Head Restraints

Removing Head Restraint

NOTE: The rear head restraints are not adjustable.

To install the head restraint, insert the head restraint rods

into each guide, apply pressure down on the headrest

until the head restraint reaches the first lock position,

push the large button in and push down and adjust head

restraint to desired position.

To remove the head restraint, pull upward on the head

restraint to it’s highest position, push in both buttons at

the base of each head restraint rod, and simultaneously

pull up on the head restraint.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Ensure that the front of the head restraint is

facing toward the front of the vehicle.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or

improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or

death in the event of a collision. The head restraints

should always be checked prior to operating the

vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in

motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the

vehicle is in PARK.

Front Heated Seat Switch

Heated Seats

After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,

Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each

switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator

lights will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for

Off.

This feature heats the front driver, passenger, and second

row seats. The controls for each heater are located near

the bottom center of the instrument panel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

Press the switch once to select High-level heat-

ing. Press the switch a second time to select

Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time

to shut the heating elements Off.

WARNING!

•

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-

haustion or other physical condition must exercise

care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns

even at low temperatures, especially if used for

long periods of time.

Do not place anything on the seat that insulates

against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This

may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a

seat that has been overheated could cause serious

burns due to the increased surface temperature of

the seat.

If High-level heating is selected, the system will auto-

matically switch to the Low-level after 30 minutes of

continuous operation. At that time, the number of indi-

cators illuminated changes from two to one, indicating

the change. Operation on the Low-level setting also turns

off automatically after 30 minutes.

•

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt

within two to five minutes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the

heating element and/or degrade the material of the

seat.

Folding Rear Seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an

additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the

illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These

loops can be tucked away when not in use.

Folding Rear Seats

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make

sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the

seatback above the seat strap.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!

This feature allows the driver to store up to two different

memory profiles for easy recall through a Memory

switch. Each memory profile contains desired position

settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable

pedals, power tilt, telescopic steering column and a set of

desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the

same positions when the unlock button is pressed.

•

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position. If the seatback is not securely locked into

position, the seat will not provide the proper

stability for child seats and/or passengers. An

improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the

rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down

position) should not be used as a play area by

children when the vehicle is in motion. They could

be seriously injured in an accident. Children

should be seated and using the proper restraint

system.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The Memory switch is located on the driver’s door trim Programming the Memory Feature

panel. The switch contains an S (SET) button to activate To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

the memory save function. It also contains a rocker

NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an

switch labeled with the number (1) and the number (2).

existing profile from memory.

The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of two

pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the appro- 1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-

priate side of the switch.

ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals, power tilt

and telescopic steering column, and radio station pre-

sets).

2. Press and release the SET button on the Memory

switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (1)

within five seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) will display which memory position is

being set.

If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into

memory as follows:

Memory Switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry

ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals, power tilt, Transmitter to Memory

telescopic steering column, and radio station presets).

Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one

of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

2. Press and release the SET button on the Memory

switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (2)

within five seconds. The EVIC will display which To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-

memory position is being set.

ing:

NOTE:

1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the

•

Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless

PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a Go™).

memory profile.

2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.

•

The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature

can be enabled or disabled. For details, refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-

Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your In-

strument Panel” for further information.

3. Press and release the SET button on the Memory

switch, then press and release the side of the rocker

switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. ЉMemory Profile Set” (1

or 2) will display in the EVIC.

4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE

transmitter within 10 seconds.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the

memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button followed MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during

by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, side

above.

mirror, adjustable pedals, power tilt and telescopic steer-

ing column stop moving. A delay of one second will

occur before another recall can be selected.

Memory Position Recall

NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory

positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not

in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC.

Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat

Only)

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

To recall the memory settings for driver one, press enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the vehicle.

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to

The distance the driver seat moves depends on where

memory position 1.

you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the

To recall the memory setting for driver two, press Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,

MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door or the for vehicles equipped with Keyless Go™).

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to

memory position 2.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

•

When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or

change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with

Keyless Go™), the driver seat will move about 2.4 in

(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater

than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear

stop. The seat will return to its previously set position

when you place the ignition in the ACC or RUN

position.

•

The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the

driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)

forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no

benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit

or Easy Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy

Entry and Easy Exit position.

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en-

abled or disabled. For details, refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable

Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or

change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with

Keyless Go™), the driver seat will move to a position

0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver

seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7 mm and

67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return

to its previously set position when you place the

ignition in the ACC or RUN position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Two latches must be released to open the hood.

2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety

catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the

center front edge of the hood.

1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side

of the instrument panel.

Hood Safety Catch

Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in

the open position.

Hood Release Lever

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

LIGHTS

CAUTION!

Headlight Switch

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to

close it. Lower the hood, until it is open approxi-

mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should

secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless

the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

The headlight switch is located on the left side of

the instrument panel. This switch controls the

operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-

ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-

rior lights and fog lights.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your

vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open

when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Headlights

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off

according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,

rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A

(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight

time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights

will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the

ignition in the OFF position. To turn the automatic

system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO

position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-

lights will come on in the automatic mode.

Headlight Switch

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent Headlights On with Wipers

for parking light and instrument panel light operation. When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on

Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on

and instrument panel light operation.

if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In

addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are

turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or 2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the

disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center AUTO position.

(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under-

3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

the headlights to the high beam position.

SmartBeam™ — If Equipped

NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is

The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward

at or above 25 mph (40 km/h).

lighting at night by automating high beam control

through the use of a digital camera mounted on the To Deactivate

inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe- Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the

cific light and automatically switches from high beams to SmartBeam™ system.

low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the

To Activate

headlights from the high beam to the low beam position.

1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the 2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to to the on position.

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and

Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding

taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds

or camera lens will cause the system to function of placing the ignition in OFF position to activate this

improperly.

feature.

Headlight Time Delay

The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding

vehicle in an unlit area.

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime

the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval Running Lights whenever the ignition is placed in the

begins when the headlight switch is turned off.

ON position, the headlights are off, and the parking

brake is released. The headlight switch must be used for

normal nighttime driving.

If you turn on the headlights or parking lights, or place

the ignition to ON again, the system will cancel the delay.

Lights-On Reminder

If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will

turn off in the normal manner.

If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition

is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert

the driver when the driver’s door is opened.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

Fog Lights

The front fog light switch is built into the head-

light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn

on the parking lights or the low beam headlights

and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog

lights, either press headlight switch again or turn off the

headlight switch.

An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates

when the fog lights are turned on.

NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam

headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the

high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Multifunction Lever

Turn Signals

Multifunction Lever

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows

on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show

proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn

signals, headlight beam selection, and passing lights. The

lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a Flash-To-Pass

very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by

bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This

moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and

defective.

remain on until the multifunction lever is released.

NOTE: A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights

EVIC and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the

driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the

on.

lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.

These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when

the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is

turned fully upward, past the second detent.

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond

the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash

three times then automatically turn off.

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch

the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever

toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk

light. To restore interior light operation, either place the

ignition in the ON position or cycle the light switch.

Dimmer Control

The dimmer control is part of the

headlight switch and is located on the

left side of the instrument panel. With

the parking lights or headlights on,

rotating the dimmer control upward

will increase the brightness of the in-

strument panel lights and, if so

equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets and

cupholders.

Overhead Console

Interior Lights

The interior lights come on when a door is opened.

Dome Light Position

Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the

second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior

lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this

position.

To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off

automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in

the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights

were switched on manually or are on because a door is

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Light Defeat (OFF)

Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off

position. The interior lights will remain off when the

doors are open.

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)

Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.

This feature brightens all text displays such as the

odometer, EVIC, and radio when the parking lights or

headlights are on.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The multifunction lever operates the windshield

wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in

the RUN position. The multifunction lever is

located on the left side of the steering column.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Control

Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first

detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper

operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent

settings for high-speed wiper operation.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper

control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for

two wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever

and then resume the intermittent interval previously

selected.

CAUTION!

Turn the windshield wipers off when driving

through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-

shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in

any position other than off.

If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is

turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles

and then turn off.

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions

make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-

tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-

tion lever to select the desired delay interval. There are

six delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe

interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a

maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield

could lead to an accident. You might not see other

vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of

the windshield during freezing weather, warm the

windshield with the defroster before and during

windshield washer use.

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward

(toward the steering column) to the second detent and

hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Mist Feature

Rain Sensing Wipers

Push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering This feature senses moisture on the windshield and

column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This

to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray

wipers will continue to operate until you release the from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate

multifunction lever.

the end of the multifunction lever to one of the six

intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature.

Headlights On with Wipers

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the

approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least

if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In sensitive and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensitive.

addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are Choose setting 3 or 4 for normal rain conditions. Choose

turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

setting 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity. Choose

setting 5 or 6 if you desire more sensitivity. The rain sense

wipers will automatically change between an intermit-

tent wipe, slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the

amount of moisture that is sensed on the windshield.

Place the multifunction lever in the off position when not

using the system.

The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or

disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-

tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

NOTE:

•

Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing

feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in

the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the

outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the

wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the

vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or

the outside temperature rises above freezing.

•

The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the

wiper speed is in the low or high position.

•

The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly

when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind-

shield.

•

Use of Rain-X௡ or products containing wax or silicone

may reduce rain sensor performance.

Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will

not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN

position, the transmission shift lever is in the NEU-

TRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than

5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the

multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is

moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

The Rain Sensing feature can be enabled or disabled.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”

for further information.

The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the

wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the

following conditions:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as

— IF EQUIPPED

desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as

upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or desired.

shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory

steering column lever is located below the multifunction

Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

lever on the steering column.

transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door

trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to

pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory

Seat” in this section.

Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-

ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause

the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the

steering column is locked before driving your ve-

hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in

serious injury or death.

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS

The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a

greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and

seat position. This feature allows both the brake and

accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the

driver to provide improved position with the steering

wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the

driver’s seat cushion side shield.

Adjustable Pedals Switch

Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward

(toward the front of the vehicle).

Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward

(toward the driver).

•

The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

The pedals can be adjusted while driving.

WARNING!

The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in

REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is on.

One of the following messages will display in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) if a pedal

adjustment is attempted when the system is locked

out: “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control

Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In

Reverse.”

Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always

adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals

or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage

to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-

ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the

adjustable pedal’s path.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory

Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door

trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre-

programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”

in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for

further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-

When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut

accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated

(40 km/h).

simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-

trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic

Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired

vehicle set speed.

The Electronic Speed Control lever, located on the right-

side of the steering wheel, operates the system.

To Activate

Push and release the ON/OFF button, located on the end

of the Electronic Speed Control lever. The indicator light

in the instrument cluster will illuminate and the cluster

will display a “Cruise ON” message to show that the

speed control system is on. To turn the system off, push

and release the ON/OFF button again. The system,

indicator light and message will turn off.

Electronic Speed Control Lever

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a

different size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the

compact spare tire.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally

set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always

leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when

you are not using it.

To Deactivate

The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without

erasing the memory if you:

•

Softly tap the brake pedal.

Press the brake pedal.

To Set At A Desired Speed

Pull the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you

(CANCEL).

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the

lever downward to SET DECEL and release, the cluster

will display the “Cruise Set” message. Remove your foot

from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at

the selected speed.

Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning the

ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory.

NOTE:

•

Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd, 4th,

or 5th gear when in the Autostick௡ mode (if

equipped).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

To Resume Speed

To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set,

If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without push down and hold the lever in SET DECEL. If the lever

erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the set

speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the speed will continue to until the lever is released. Release

previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to the lever when the desired speed is reached, and a new

RESUME ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot set speed will be established.

from the accelerator pedal.

Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DE-

To Vary the Speed Setting

CEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- decrease. Each time the lever is tapped, speed decreases.

crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME

To Accelerate For Passing

ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the

RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed

will be established.

Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills

Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME

ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed

increase. Each time the lever is tapped speed increases, so

tapping the lever three times will increase speed by

3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains

speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The automatic transmission will downshift while climb- PARKSENSEா REAR PARK ASSIST

ing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is The ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist system is a driver aid

necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.

that senses for obstacles behind the vehicle. Refer to

ParkSense௡ System Usage Precautions for limitations of

this system and recommendations.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so

it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed

Control.

ParkSense௡ is active when the driver shifts the transmis-

sion into the REVERSE position, and the parking brake is

not applied, and the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph

(16 km/h).

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the

system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-

hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you

could lose control. An accident could be the result.

Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic

or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or

slippery.

ParkSense௡ can be turned on or off through the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the vehicle is in

PARK. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-

tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

ParkSense௡ uses four sensors located in the rear bumper The Warning Display contains two sets of yellow and red

to scan for obstacles up to 79 in (200 cm) away from the indicators, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left

rear bumper fascia. The ParkSense௡ Warning Display rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles

located above the rear window provides both visible and behind the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view

audible warnings to indicate the range of the object.

the indicators either through the rearview mirror or by

looking at the display above the rear window.

ParkSense௡ dimly illuminates the two inner most yellow

indicators when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The

following chart shows the warning display operation

when the system is detecting an obstacle:

ParkSense௡ LED Display

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES

DISPLAY INDICA-

TOR

OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM:

INDICATOR

COLOR

AUDIBLE SIGNAL

REAR CORNERS

REAR CENTER

79 in (200 cm)

51.2 in (130 cm)

45.3 in (115 cm)

39.3 in (100 cm)

33.5 in (85 cm)

27.6 in (70 cm)

19.7 in (50 cm)

11.8 in (30 cm)

Inner LED

1st LED

2nd LED

3rd LED

4th LED

5th LED

6th LED

7th LED

Yellow

Red

Yes, Half Second

31.5 in (80 cm)

25.5 in (65 cm)

20 in (50 cm)

16 in (40 cm)

6 in (15 cm)

Yes, Intermittent

Yes, Continuous

Red

ParkSenseா System Usage Precautions

•

Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could

affect the performance of the ParkSense௡ Rear Park

Assist system.

NOTE:

•

Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,

dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense௡ Rear Park

Assist system operating properly.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

•

When you turn ParkSense௡ off, the instrument cluster

will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED.” Further-

more, once you turn ParkSense௡ off, it remains off

until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition

key.

clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt, or other

obstruction, see your authorized dealer for service.

•

Clean the ParkSense௡ sensors regularly, taking care

not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not

be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt, or debris.

Failure to do so can result in ParkSense௡ not working

properly. The ParkSense௡ system might not detect an

obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide

a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/

bumper.

When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE

position and ParkSense௡ is turned off, the instrument

cluster will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” mes-

sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

•

ParkSense௡, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is

sounding a tone.

Objects must not be within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear

fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do

so can result in the system misinterpreting a close

object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE

PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in

the instrument cluster.

If a ParkSense௡ system malfunction occurs, a single

chime will sound once per ignition cycle. In addition,

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will

display “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” and the

LED in the ParkSense௡ switch will illuminate. If this

occurs after making sure the rear fascia/bumper is

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

WARNING!

•

The ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist system is only a

parking aid and it is unable to recognize every

obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs

might be temporarily detected or not detected at

all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors

will not be detected when they are in close prox-

imity.

The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the

ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist system to be able to

stop in time when the obstacle is detected. It is

recommended that the driver looks over his/her

shoulder when using ParkSense௡.

•

Drivers must be careful when backing up even

when using the ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist sys-

tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,

look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-

trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and

blind spots before backing up. You are responsible

for safety and must continue to pay attention to

your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

WARNING! (Continued)

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights

and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door

Opener (HomeLink௡) buttons and power sunroof switch

may also be included, if equipped.

•

Before using the ParkSense௡ Rear Park Assist

system, it is strongly recommended that the ball

mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected

from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for

towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or

damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch

ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the

rear fascia when the warning display turns on the

single flashing arc and sounds the continuous

tone. Also, the ParkSense௡ sensors could detect

the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending

on its size and shape, giving a false indication that

an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

Overhead Console

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Courtesy/Reading Lights

The storage compartment access is a Љpush/pushЉ design.

Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.

Push on the raised bar to close.

At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/

reading lights.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink௡ replaces up to three remote controls (hand-

held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage

door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security

systems. The HomeLink௡ unit operates off your vehicle’s

battery.

Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time

to turn off the light.

These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when

the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter is pressed, when the Passive Entry door

handle is used (refer to “Passive Entry” in “Things to

Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion) or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward,

past the second detent.

The HomeLink௡ buttons are located in the overhead

console, and contain one, two or three dots/lines desig-

nating the different HomeLink௡ channels.

Sunglasses Storage

At the rear of the overhead console, a compartment is

provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

WARNING!

•

Your motorized door or gate will open and close

while you are training the Universal Transceiver.

Do not train the transceiver if people, pets, or

other objects are in the path of the door or gate.

Only use this transceiver with a garage door

opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as

required by federal safety standards. This includes

most garage door opener models manufactured

after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener with-

out these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–

3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for

safety information or assistance.

HomeLink௡ Buttons

NOTE: HomeLink௡ is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-

rity Alarm is active.

•

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-

gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage

while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can

cause serious injury or death.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Programming HomeLinkா

2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)

from the HomeLink௡ buttons while keeping the EVIC

display in view.

Before You Begin

If you have not trained any of the HomeLink௡ buttons,

erase all channels before you begin training.

For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-

held transmitter away from the HomeLink௡.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up

to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING 3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen

CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC mes- HomeLink௡ button and the handheld transmitter button

sage states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”

until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #

TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”

It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the

handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to Then release both the HomeLink௡ and handheld trans-

HomeLink௡ for more efficient training and accurate mitter buttons.

transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat

Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the

while training.

handheld transmitter.

1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.

It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The

garage door may open and close while you train.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers This can usually be found where the hanging antenna

may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is

in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section. NOT the button normally used to open and close the

door).

4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink௡ button. If

the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now

state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”

If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-

ING” repeat Step 3.

NOTE: After training a HomeLink௡ channel, if the

garage door does not operate with HomeLink௡ and the

garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the

garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed

to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”

5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM

At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate

the “Learn” or “Training” button.

1 — Garage Door Opener

2 — Training Button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

button. The name and color of the button may vary by Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-

manufacturer.

nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of

transmission – which may not be long enough for

HomeLink௡ to pick up the signal during programming.

Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next

step after the LEARN button has been pressed.

7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed designed to “time-out” in the same manner.

HomeLink௡ button twice (holding the button for two

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling

seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and

process to prevent possible overheating of the garage

activates, programming is complete.

door or gate motor.

If the device does not activate, press the button a third

If you are having difficulties programming a garage door

time (for two seconds) to complete the training.

opener or

gate operator, replace “Programming

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:

call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink௡ button,

while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld

www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

To program the remaining two HomeLink௡ buttons, transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink௡ has

repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT

erase the channels.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC 1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.

display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to

“CHANNEL # TRAINED.”

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button for

20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #

If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in TRAINING.” Do not release the button.

at this time.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-

under “Programming ming HomeLink௡ Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Then proceed with Step

HomeLink௡” earlier in this section.

Security

Using HomeLinkா

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn

To operate, press and release the programmed in your vehicle.

HomeLink௡ button. Activation will now occur for the

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for

trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,

security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,

etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be

used at any time.

20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS

CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-

vidual channels cannot be erased.

The HomeLink௡ Universal Transceiver is disabled when

the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkா Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Troubleshooting Tips

1. This device may not cause harmful interference

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink௡, here

are some of the most common solutions:

2. This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that may cause undesired

operation

•

Replace the battery in the original transmitter.

Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies

complete the training for rolling code.

with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to operate the

device.

•

Did you unplug the device for training, and remember

to plug it back in?

If you are having any problems or require assistance,

please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at

www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num-

ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-

cations were met.

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry

Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun

visors on the overhead console.

WARNING!

•

Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in

the ignition switch (or the ignition in the ACC or

RUN position, when using Keyless Go™). Occu-

pants, particularly unattended children, can be-

come entrapped by the power sunroof while oper-

ating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment

may result in serious injury or death.

•

In an accident, there is a greater risk of being

thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You

could also be seriously injured or killed. Always

fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all

passengers are also properly secured.

Do not allow small children to operate the sun-

roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or

any object, to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

Power Sunroof Controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Opening Sunroof — Express

sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-

Press the power sunroof switch rearward and release, tion if this occurs. Next, press the power sunroof switch

and the sunroof will open automatically from any posi- forward and release to Express Close.

tion. The sunroof will open fully and then stop automati-

Pinch Protect Override

cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express

If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,

Open operation, any movement of the power sunroof

press the power sunroof switch forward and hold for two

switch will stop the sunroof.

seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof

Closing Sunroof — Express

to move towards the closed position.

Press the power sunroof switch forward and release, and

the sunroof will close automatically from any position.

The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This

NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the power

sunroof switch is pressed.

is called “Express Close”. During Express Close opera- Venting Sunroof — Express

tion, any movement of the power sunroof switch will Press and release the ЉVentЉ button in the center of the

stop the sunroof.

power sunroof switch, and the sunroof will open to the

vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, which oper-

ates regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent

operation, any movement of the power sunroof switch

will stop the sunroof.

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of

the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-

struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

Sunshade Operation

Sunroof Maintenance

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean

sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation

open.

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to

60 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-

tion. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with Sunroof Fully Closed

the rear windows open, then open the front and rear Press the power sunroof switch forward and release to

windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the ensure that the sunroof is fully closed.

buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the

sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any

window.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

The 12 Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray has

There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets power available only when the ignition is placed in the

on this vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by ACC or RUN position.

a fuse.

Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power

outlets for use to ensure proper operation.

NOTE:

•

To ensure proper operation a MOPAR௡ knob and

element must be used.

•

Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13

Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power

rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will

need to be replaced.

Front Power Outlet

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

WARNING!

Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on

the center console on vehicle’s not equipped with the

ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could

result.

The center console outlet is powered directly from the

battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into

this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the

engine from starting.

Center Console Power Outlet

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

•

Only devices designed for use in this type of

outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

Do not touch with wet hands.

Close the lid when not in use and while driving

the vehicle.

If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an

electric shock and failure.

•

Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the

battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-

mittently and with greater caution.

After the use of high power draw accessories or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs

only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-

sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the

power outlet can cause damage.

•

CAUTION!

•

Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in

use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life

and/or prevent the engine from starting.

•

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

CUPHOLDERS

Rear Seat Cupholders

The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest

between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned

forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide

convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while

maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows.

Front Seat Cupholders

The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the

center console.

Front Seat Cupholders

Rear Seat Cupholders

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

STORAGE

Console Features

The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins

with rubber mats for holding small items. For vehicles

not equipped with navigation radio, the console also

contains an extra storage bin located below the climate

control, which holds up to four CD jewel cases.

Two separate storage compartments are also located

underneath the armrest.

1 — Release button for bottom compartment

2 — Release button for top compartment

3 — Top Compartment

4 — Bottom Compartment. (You can access this compartment

directly, without first exposing the upper compartment, by oper-

ating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the

armrest down.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen

and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will

hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also con-

tains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder

(designed to hold various size coins). A slot in the left and

right side of the top compartment provides clearance for

power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the

lid closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptop’s,

cellular phones or other electrical equipment. The con-

sole’s front opening lid allows for easy access to these

compartments.

WARNING!

The weight and position of cargo and passengers can

change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle

handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-

sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your

vehicle:

•

Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put

heavier objects as low and as far forward as

possible.

Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear

axle. Too much weight or improperly placed

weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the

rear of the vehicle to sway.

Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of

the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-

come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or

collision.

•

Cargo Area

The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying

versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling

nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When

the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,

nearly-flat extension of the load floor.

•

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make

sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the

seatback above the seat strap.

WARNING! (Continued)

•

To help protect against personal injury, passengers

should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The

rear cargo space is intended for load carrying

purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit

in seats and use seat belts.

WARNING!

•

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position. If the seatback in not securely locked

into position, the seat will not provide the proper

stability for child seats and/or passengers. An

improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the

rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down

position) should not be used as a play area by

children when the vehicle is in motion. They could

be seriously injured in an accident. Children

should be seated and using the proper restraint

system.

CARGO AREA FEATURES

Trunk Mat — If Equipped

A reversible trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo

area. The rubber side of the mat is used to protect the

interior of the trunk from mud, snow, and debris. It

provides a nonskid surface to keep cargo from sliding.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

CAUTION! (Continued)

Rear Window Defroster

•

Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to

the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off

after soaking with warm water.

Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-

sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

The rear window defroster button is located on the

climate control. Press this button to turn on the

rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if

equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate

when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window

defroster automatically turns off after approximately

10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,

press the button a second time.

•

Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

▫ Keyless Go Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 212

Ⅵ Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Ⅵ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Ⅵ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 199

▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS)

– If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

▫ Uconnect™ GPS — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 215

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

▫ System Warnings (Customer Information

Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 206

▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

▫ Performance Pages — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 208

▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Ⅵ Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Ⅵ Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —

AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/

NAV — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 234

Ⅵ Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM

Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)

And Sirius Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Command

System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

▫ Operating Instructions —

Uconnect™ phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 222

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 235

▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD

And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio . . . . . 222

▫ Clock Setting Procedure —

RER/REN Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 246

▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 246

Ⅵ Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo

Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack). . . . . . . 226

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 226 Ⅵ Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) 0.5

— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD

And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

▫ Connecting The iPod௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185

▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™

Multimedia (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

▫ Controlling The iPod௡ Using Radio

Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone

(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Ⅵ Kicker௡ High Performance Sound System With

Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS)

Ⅵ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)

– If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

— If Equipped (REN/RER/RES Radios Only) . . 252

Ⅵ Video Entertainment System (VES)™

▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius

Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 253

▫ Kicker௡ Mobile Surround (KMS1)௡

– If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Ⅵ Remote Sound System Controls

— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Ⅵ CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Ⅵ Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 263

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Ⅵ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

▫ Automatic Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . 263

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlet

2 — Instrument Cluster

3 — Hazard Switch

4 — Analog Clock

5 — Electronic Stability Program Off Button*

6 — Glove Compartment

7 — Radio

13 — Ignition Switch

14 — Hood Release

15 — Trunk Release Button

16 — Headlight Switch

* If Equipped

8 — Climate Control

9 — Heated Seat Switch*

10 — Power Outlet

11 — Ash Tray*

12 — Storage Compartment*

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

NOTE:

•

A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven

more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.

1. Electronic Speed Control / Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will turn on when the electronic

speed control or Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) is ON.

•

Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either

indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

5. Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

2. Low Fuel Indicator Light

This light will turn on and a single chime will 6. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

sound when the fuel level drops to approximately Display / Odometer

1/8 tank.

The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has

been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require that upon

transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the

purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been

driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,

the repair technician should leave the odometer reading

the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he

cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and

a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the

3. Front Fog Light Indicator

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog

lights are on.

4. Turn Signal Indicators

The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal

when the turn signal lever is operated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap

for you to make a record of the odometer reading before may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is

properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if

The red segments indicate the maximum permissible

the odometer must be reset at zero.

7. Tachometer

engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear

This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red

Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions area.

exist. (Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” for further information).

8. Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light will turn on and a single chime will

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

sound to warn of an overheated engine condition.

When this light turns on, the engine temperature

is critically hot. The vehicle should be turned OFF

immediately and serviced as soon as possible.

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel

filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

“Check Gascap” message will display in the odometer

display area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and 9. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the

message. If the problem continues, the message will

appear the next time the vehicle is started.

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition

switch is placed in the RUN position and may stay on for

as long as four seconds.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at

then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized

functioning and service is required. However, the con- dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed

ventional brake system will continue to operate normally and corrected.

if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

WARNING!

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced

as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock

brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the

ignition switch placed in the RUN position, have the light

inspected by an authorized dealer.

If a warning light remains on the system may not be

working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or

BAS. Under certain driving conditions, where ESP or

BAS would be beneficial, you - if you have not

adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to

account for the lack of the feature, may be in acci-

dent.

10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist

System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light

The yellow Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Malfunction Indi-

cator Light will turn on when the key in the

ignition switch placed in the RUN position.

The light should go out with the engine running. If the

light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the

11. Airbag Warning Light

This light will turn on for six to eight seconds

as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first

placed in the RUN position. If the light is either

not on during starting, or stays on, or turns on

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

while driving, then have the system inspected at an system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is

authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on

Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has

Vehicle” for further information.

dropped below a specified level.

12. Brake Warning Light

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

This light monitors various brake functions,

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-

tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on, it may

indicate that the parking brake is applied, that

the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with

the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-

sary.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been

disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the

master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will

remain on until the condition has been corrected.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-

ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will

take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an

accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-

ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Traction

(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Control System (TCS) Indicator Light

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

If this indicator light flashes during accelera-

tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as

little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and

driving to the prevailing road conditions, and

do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

RUN position. The light should illuminate for approxi- 14. Temperature Gauge

mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-

the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that

If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

by an authorized dealer.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,

applied with the ignition switch in the RUN position.

or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to

exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage

your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F

(116°C) or greater, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle

the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until

the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–

230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F

(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the

engine OFF immediately, and call for service.

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call a service center if your

vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the

hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”

and follow the warnings under the Cooling System

Pressure Cap paragraph.

15. Trip Odometer Button

Press this button to change the display from odometer to

either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”

will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and

hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer

to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to

reset it.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195

16. High Beam Light

This light will turn on when the high beam

headlights are ON. Push the multifunction lever

away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to

high beam.

19. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-

mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security

alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly

until the vehicle is disarmed.

17. Shift Lever Indicator

20. Fuel Gauge

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when

the ignition switch is placed in the RUN position.

The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the

instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the

automatic transmission.

21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check

when the ignition switch is placed in the RUN

position. This light will also turn on while the

engine is running if there is a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.

18. Seat Belt Reminder Light

This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as

a bulb check when the ignition switch is first

placed in the RUN position. A chime will sound if

the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check.

The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash, or remain on

continuously, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled

after the bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant

Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely

bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,

place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition

through the ACC and RUN positions. The light should

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when

one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

If the light is flashing when the engine is running,

immediate service is required. In this case, you may

experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle

or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.

Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if

the light does not come on during starting.

22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly, when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle

has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those

tires.)

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper

tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS

low tire pressure telltale.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when using re-

placement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or

balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a

TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

23. Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charg-

ing system. The light should come on when the

ignition switch is first placed in the RUN position and

remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or

comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,

(if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after

means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL

charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In

an authorized dealer.

most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will

not require towing.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting

Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

CAUTION!

24. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

damage to the engine control system. It also could

affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is

flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and

power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is

required.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of

an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The

OBD system monitors engine and automatic

transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when

the ignition is in the RUN position before engine start. If

the MIL does not come on when turning the key from

OFF to RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.

This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.

The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure

shown in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced

above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal

operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you

drive slowly or park over flammable substances such

as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could

result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-

pants or others.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC)

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-

tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the

instrument cluster.

25. Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The

light should turn on momentarily when the engine

is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the

vehicle, and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible. A

single chime will sound when this light turns on.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•

Vehicle information warning message displays

Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)

Compass display

Outside temperature display

Trip computer functions

Uconnect™ Phone displays (if equipped)

Uconnect™ gps screens (if equipped)

Audio mode display

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

This system conveniently allows the driver to select a

variety of useful information by pressing the switches

mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the

following:

Surround Sound modes (if equipped with Driver-

Selectable Surround [DSS])

•

Performance Pages (if equipped)

•

System status

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201

The system allows the driver to select information by

pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering

wheel.

Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip

Functions, Performance Pages (if equipped),

Uconnect™ gps (if equipped), System Status

Messages, and Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features). The SCROLL button

also functions as a remote sound system con-

SCROLL

Button

Press and release the MENU button and the

mode displayed will change between Trip

Functions, Performance Pages (if equipped),

trol. Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”.

Uconnect™ gps (if equipped), System Warn-

ings, System Status, and Personal Settings.

Button

Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the

Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with

compass reading and outside temperature, this

screen will display radio and media mode

information depending on which radio is in the

vehicle. Refer to “Remote Sound System

Controls”.

Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept

a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button

also functions as a remote sound system con-

trol. Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”.

AUDIO

MODE

Button

FUNCTION

SELECT

Button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Displays

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays

the following messages:

•

Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not In PARK (with

a single chime)

Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a

single chime)

•

Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if

the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with

either turn signal on)

•

Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK

Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single

chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])

•

Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

•

Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single

chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])

Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single

chime)

Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in

motion)

•

Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)

Memory #1/#2 Profile Set

•

Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)

Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)

Oil Pressure

Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall

Oil Change Required (with single chime)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203

•

ACC Off — When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

system is turned off. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle” (if equipped).

•

Distance Set — After changing the desired following

distance in the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system,

this message will display momentarily. Refer to

“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding

The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

ACC Ready — When the Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) system is activated. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

Attention — If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

system predicts that its maximum braking level is not

sufficient to maintain the set distance, this message

will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues

to apply its maximum braking capacity. When this

occurs, you should immediately apply the brakes as

needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle

ahead. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if

equipped).

ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system. Refer to

“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding

The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after

setting the desired speed in the Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC) system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•

ACC Blinded — If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

system deactivates due to performance limiting con-

ditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if

equipped).

•

Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Vehicle In REVERSE

(with a single chime) — only available on vehicles

equipped with memory seats.

•

Channel # Transmit

Channel # Training

Channel # Trained

Clearing Channels

Channels Cleared

Did Not Train

ACC Unavailable — If the Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) system turns off due to a temporary malfunc-

tion that limits functionality. Refer to “Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea-

tures Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

Service ACC — If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

system turns off due to an internal system fault that

requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer to

“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding

The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).

Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to

information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure

Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”

•

Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to

information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure

Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”

Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Cruise Engaged (with a

single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped

with memory seats.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205

•

Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer

to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure

Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”

•

0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) (if equipped with Performance

Pages)

Braking Distance (if equipped with Performance

Pages)

Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer

to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure

Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”

•

1/8 Mile (if equipped with Performance Pages)

1/4 Mile (if equipped with Performance Pages)

Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to

information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure

Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”

Instantaneous G-Force (if equipped with Performance

Pages)

Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting

And Operating”)

•

Peak G-Force (if equipped with Performance Pages)

Digital Speedometer (if equipped with Performance

Pages)

•

Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)

Turn To Run (refer to “Remote Starting System” in

“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”)

•

Upshift

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Engine Oil Change Indicator System

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times

within 10 seconds.

Oil Change Required

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-

start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not

onds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the

reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change

indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the Trip Functions

engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent Press and release the MENU button until one of the

upon your personal driving style.

following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each

time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN

position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and

release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-

tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)

refer to the following procedure.

•

Average Fuel Economy

Distance To Empty

Trip A

Trip B

Elapsed Time

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not

start the engine).

Display Units of Measure in

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207

Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle

Computer functions.

loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of

the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.

The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-

tion.

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)

estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change

to a text display of ЉLOW FUEL.Љ This display will

continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a

significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the

ЉLOW FUELЉ text and a new DTE value will display.

•

Average Fuel Economy

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.

When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read

“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the

history information will be erased, and the averaging will

continue from the last fuel average reading before the

reset.

•

Trip A

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last

reset.

•

Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with

•

Trip B

the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last

determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous reset.

and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel

tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION

SELECT button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•

Elapsed Time

Performance Pages — If Equipped

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset

when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed

time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON

or START position.

WARNING!

Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-

mance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road

use only and should not be done on any public

roadways. It is recommended that these features be

used in a controlled environment and within the

limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as

measured by the performance pages must never be

exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which

can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of

others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can

prevent accidents.

•

Display Units of Measure in

To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-

TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”

appears.

To Reset The Display

Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being

displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT

button once to clear the resettable function being dis-

played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release

the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within

three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed func-

tion (>Reset ALL will display during this three-second

window).

The Performance Pages include the following features:

•

0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)

Braking Distance

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209

•

1/8 Mile

•

The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at

0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when

conditions are met for the event to begin.

1/4 Mile

Instantaneous G-Force

Peak G-Force

•

Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph

(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.

Digital Speedometer

The time will continue to display until the FUNCTION

SELECT button is pressed.

To access, press and release the MENU button until

Performance Pages displays in the EVIC. Press the

SCROLL button to cycle through the features. Press the

FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature.

Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the

current run time and display the vehicle’s best

0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time.

The following describes each feature and its operation:

•

To clear the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time,

press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for

five seconds.

0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)

When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for

the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within Braking Distance

10 seconds. When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking

distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was

depressed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•

This feature will only function when applying the 1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile

brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).

When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the

vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 seconds

and the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/

•

Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.

The word “READY” will flash when conditions are 4 mile).

met for the event to begin.

•

The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph

(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi-

tions are met for the event to begin.

•

The distance and speed measurements display while

the event is taking place.

The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake

pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com-

plete stop.

•

Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach

1/8 mile (1/4 mile) in less then 30 seconds.

The time and speed will continue to display until the

FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed.

•

The distance and speed measurements will continue to

display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is

pressed.

Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the

current run and display the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile

(1/4 mile) run.

Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the

current run and prepare the cluster to record a new

run.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211

•

To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run,

press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for

five seconds.

•

Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the

peak force values.

Digital Speedometer

Instantaneous G-Force

When selected, this screen displays vehicle speed and

When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force records top speed.

(longitudinal and lateral) along with a friction circle that

•

Press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for

three seconds to toggle between current speed and top

speed.

displays the directions of the forces.

Peak G-Force

When selected, this screen displays all four G-force

values (two longitudinal and two lateral).

To reset top speed, quickly press and release the

FUNCTION SELECT button when top speed is

displayed.

•

When a force greater than zero is measured, the

display will update the value as it climbs. As the

G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Keyless Go Display — If Equipped

The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the

When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition

change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Go icon switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible

momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing the by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display

new ignition switch position.

appears.

Refer to “Keyless Go” in “Starting And Operating” for

more information.

NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be

superseded by another display of higher priority. But

when the ignition switch position is changed, the display

always re-appears.

Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If

Equipped

Press and release the MENU button until “Surround

Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides infor-

mation on the current surround mode.

Keyless Go Display

•

Stereo

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213

•

Video Surround

Audio Surround

displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings

are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.

Automatic Compass Calibration

While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNC-

TION SELECT button to change surround modes. The

Video Surround Mode will only be available for video

media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media

supported by the radio).

This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the

need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is

new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will

display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may

also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360

degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic

objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC

turns off. The compass will now function normally.

Compass Display

The compass readings indicate the direction

the vehicle is facing. Press and release the

HOME button to display one of eight compass

Manual Compass Calibration

readings and the outside temperature.

If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message

does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the

compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:

HOME

Button

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside

temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to

be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-

ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately

two seconds.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass” NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of

displays in the EVIC.

the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Lap-

tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass

module is located, and it can cause interference with the

compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to

start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in

the EVIC.

5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free

from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”

message turns off. The compass will now function

normally.

Compass Variance

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic

North and Geographic North. To compensate for the

differences, the variance should be set for the zone where

the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly

set, the compass will automatically compensate for the

differences and provide the most accurate compass head-

ing.

Compass Variance Map

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can

two seconds.

be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map

display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but-

ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.

3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”

message and the last variance zone number displays in

the EVIC.

Turn-by-Turn Directions

The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a pro-

grammed destination when Turn-by-Turn Navigation is

enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the

EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the

top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the

direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to

indicate the distance to the turn.

4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until

the proper variance zone is selected according to the

map.

5. Press and release the HOME button to exit.

Uconnect™ gps — If Equipped

Uconnect™ gps Display Control

NOTE: Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for

detailed operating instructions.

Press and release the MENU button until Navigation

displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On,

the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map

or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu

display is active, the SCROLL button can be used to scroll

through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

System Warnings (Customer Information

Features)

Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-

tings displays in the EVIC.

Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM

WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the

SCROLL button to display anyone of the following

choices.

Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following

choices:

“Language”

When in this display, you may select one of five lan-

guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip

functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press

the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to

select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.

Then, as you continue, the information will display in the

selected language.

•

Oil Temperature

Shows the actual oil temperature.

•

Oil Pressure

Shows the actual oil pressure.

•

Tire Pressure

Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING

THE SPARE TIRE).

NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect™ lan-

guage selection. Refer to the Uconnect™ User Manual

located on the DVD for further details.

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall

features when the transmission is in PARK.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217

“Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)”

the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE

When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,

when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until

To make your selection, press and release the FUNC- “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.

TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry

“Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit”

and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st

When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the Press, all doors will unlock no matter which handle is

vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only

NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is

make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is

SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

programmed touching the handle more than once will

only result in the driver’s door opening. You have to

touch a passenger handle to unlock all doors passively

when Driver’s Door Only is programmed in the EVIC.

“Remote Key Unlock”

When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s

door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver “Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock” — If

Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE Equipped

transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen- When ON is selected, you can use your RKE transmitter

ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Each memory profile contains desired position settings “Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers”

for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if When ON is selected, the system will automatically

equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on

(if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets. the windshield. To make your selection, press and release

When OFF is selected, only the memory switch on the the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”

driver’s door panel will recall memory profiles. To make appears. When OFF is selected, the system reverts to the

your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE- standard intermittent wiper operation.

LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to

“Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit” — If

“Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features

Equipped

Of Your Vehicle”.

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

“Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock”

enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the

the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap-

may be selected with or without the flash lights on pears.

lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press and

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat

release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or

location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set

“OFF” appears.

to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219

door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime

The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the

brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle”.

“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock”

When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will

flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the

RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or

without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make

your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-

LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

“Delay Turning Headlights Off”

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press

and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”

“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.

“Headlights On with Wipers”

“Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse”

When ON is selected, and the HEADLIGHT switch is in

the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-

mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The

headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned

off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your

selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT

button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

When ON is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will

tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the ON

position and the transmission is in the REVERSE posi-

tion. The mirrors will move back to their previous

position when the transmission is shifted out of RE-

VERSE. To make your selection, press and release the

FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”

appears.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

“Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock”

“Confirmation of Voice Commands” — If

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate Equipped

and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are When ON is selected, all voice commands from the

unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec- Uconnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selec-

tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button

until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.

until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit”

“Park Assist System”

When this feature is selected, the power WINDOW When ON is selected, the system will scan for objects

switches, radio, Uconnect™ Phone (if equipped), DVD behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the

video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), REVERSE or NEUTRAL position. To make your selec-

and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button

after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,

“Turn-by-Turn Navigation” — If Equipped

press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until

When ON is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will

“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60

appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig-

min.” appears.

nated turn within a programmed route. To make your

selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT

button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221

“Display Units of Measure in”

The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if

equipped) can be changed between English and Metric

units of measure. To make your selection, press and

release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “EN-

GLISH” or “METRIC” appears.

“Automatic High Beams” — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights

will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To

make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to

“SmartBeam™” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle” for further information.

Analog Clock

SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK

To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument

panel, press and hold the button until the setting is

correct.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —

Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone —

AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If Equipped

IF EQUIPPED

Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle”.

NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side

of the unit’s faceplate.

Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio

The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD To Manually Set the Clock

player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD).

Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm)

touch screen allows for easy menu selection.

1. Turn on the radio.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock

setting menu will appear on the screen.

The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System

(GPS)-based Navigation system.

3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the

word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-

played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen

where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-

ward is displayed.

Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ

user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.

Operating Instructions — Voice Command

System — If Equipped

For the radio, refer to “Voice Command” in “Understand-

ing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where

the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223

displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the Show Time if Radio is Off

screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing When selected, this feature will display the time of day

downward is displayed.

on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed

as follows to change the current setting:

5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where

the word “Save” is displayed.

1. Turn on the radio.

Changing Daylight Savings Time

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The

When selected, this feature will display the time of day in clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the

3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in

current setting:

the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”

1. Turn on the radio.

Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is

Off” are displayed to change the current setting.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The

clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

Changing the Time Zone

3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in 1. Turn on the radio.

the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The

clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-

played to change the current setting.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN

displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on

1. Turn on the radio.

the screen.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.

4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your

selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you 3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the

want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.

4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the

5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-

played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen

where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-

Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio

Uconnect௡ gps — RER Only

ward is displayed.

The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to

the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The

satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the

worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s

clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and

daylight savings information is set.

5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where

the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is

displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the

screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing

downward is displayed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225

6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where 1. Turn on the radio.

the word “Save” is displayed.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.

Changing Daylight Savings Time

3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the

clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

When selected, this feature will display the time of day in

daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the

current setting:

4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in

the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”

Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is

1. Turn on the radio.

2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the Off” are displayed to change the current setting.

clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

Changing the Time Zone

3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in

the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the

1. Turn on the radio.

screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis- 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.

played to change the current setting.

3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the

Show Time if Radio is Off

clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

When selected, this feature will display the time of day

on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed

as follows to change the current setting:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are

displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on

the screen.

5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your

selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you

want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is

displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.

6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.

MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO

RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)

RES Radio

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right

side of the radio faceplate.

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

TIME Button

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time

radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second and radio frequency.

time to turn off the radio.

Clock Setting Procedure

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/

the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the SCROLL control knob.

volume, and to the left decreases it.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes

set at the same volume level as last played.

will begin to blink.

SEEK Buttons

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control

listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch knob to save time change.

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio

5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

will remain tuned to the new station until you make

another selection. Holding either button will bypass

stations without stopping, until you release it.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RW/FF

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either treble tones.

AM or FM frequencies.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth

TUNE Control

time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between

the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to

time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

mid-range tones.

AM/FM Button

Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229

SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton

Memory

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

When you are receiving a station that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto

this station and press and release that button. If a button

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you

commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM

stations).

is not selected within five seconds after pressing the DISC Button

SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from

will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press MP3 Audio Play

the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the

display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.

The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by

pressing the pushbutton twice.

NOTE:

•

The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),

recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and

multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

CAUTION!

•

This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs

only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel

away and jam the player mechanism.

RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert

a second CD if one is already loaded.

Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the

other side is a CD) should not be used, and they

can cause damage to the player.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD

label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into

the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the

radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than

1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be

ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

•

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and

begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will

show the track number, and index time in minutes and

seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

TIME Button

Press this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD

player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or

RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)

button works in a similar manner.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,

the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

AM/FM Button

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on

convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate

Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the

compact disc in random order to provide an interesting

change of pace.

SEEK Button

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the

CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning

of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the

previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK

button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in

CD and MP3 modes.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-

domly selected track.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

Play.

•

Maximum number of folder levels: 8

Maximum number of files: 255

Notes on Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3

file recording media and formats are limited. When

writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-

tions.

Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file

names and folder names is limited. For large numbers

of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to

display the file name and folder name, and will assign

a number instead. With a maximum number of files,

exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With

200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this

display.)

Supported Media (Disc Types)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-

mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

•

Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

•

Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-

character extension)

Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-

character extension)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files

Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). VBR bit rate.

Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after

MPEG Specifi-

cation

Sampling Fre-

quency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of

multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in

longer disc loading times.

320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32

160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,

16, 8

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-

sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3

extension may cause playback problems. The radio is

designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will

not play the file.

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3

24, 22.05, 16

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title

are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not

supported by the radios.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to

an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the

following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not

supported.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Playback of MP3 Files

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which

radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an

contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s

time to start playing the MP3 files.

audio system to amplify the source and play through the

vehicle speakers.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected

by the following:

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to

auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

•

Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the

device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is

not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX

audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.

Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

Number of files and folders - Loading times will

increase with more files and folders

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is

to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).

single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option

before writing to the disc.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235

MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM

STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX

JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right

side of the radio faceplate.

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the

radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second

time to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the

ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the

volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be

set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEK Buttons

RES/RSC Radio

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next

listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped

will remain tuned to the new station until you make Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature

another selection. Holding either button will bypass (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-

stations without stopping until you release it.

standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.

Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not

Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea- available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With

tures If Your Vehicle”.

Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.

Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If

Equipped

TIME Button

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time

Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature and radio frequency.

(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-

standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not

available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/

Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.

SCROLL control knob.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button

SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call

will begin to blink.

letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text

message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control RW/FF

knob to save time change.

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the

direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.

For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the

SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select

SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,

starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite

TUNE Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

procedure, starting at Step 2. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS

will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to

time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

mid-range tones.

MUSIC TYPE Button

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button

time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be se-

treble tones.

lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast

Music Type information.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth

time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following

SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the format types:

sound level from the right or left side speakers.

16-Digit Character Dis-

Program Type

play

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time

No program type or un-

defined

and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between

the front and rear speakers.

None

Adult Hits

Classical

Adlt Hit

Classicl

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239

16-Digit Character Dis-

play

16-Digit Character Dis-

Program Type

play

Classic Rock

College

Country

Cls Rock

College

Country

Language

Inform

Jazz

Soft

Soft Rock

Soft Rhythm and Blues

Sports

Soft

Soft Rck

Soft R&B

Sports

Talk

Top 40

Weather

Foreign Language

Information

Jazz

Talk

Top 40

Weather

News

Nostalgia

Oldies

Nostalga

Oldies

Persnlty

Public

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon

is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency

station with the same selected Music Type name. The

Music Type function only operates when in the FM

mode.

Personality

Public

Rhythm and Blues

Religious Music

Religious Talk

Rock

R & B

Rel Musc

Rel Talk

Rock

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type

(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be

exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SETUP Button

window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button is

the following items:

not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/

RND button, the station will continue to play but will not

be stored into pushbutton memory.

•

Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow

you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the

TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the You may add a second station to each pushbutton by

hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press

the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the

the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

to save time change.

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.

The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by

pressing the pushbutton twice.

AM/FM Button

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton

Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241

Buttons 1 - 6

Inserting Compact Disc(s)

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD

commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into

stations).

the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the

radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than

1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be

ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

DISC/AUX Button

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch

from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and

begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will

show the track number, and index time in minutes and

Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and

MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:

•

The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

position to operate the radio.

CAUTION!

•

This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),

recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact

discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and

multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

•

This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs

only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on

convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

CAUTION! (Continued)

Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel

away and jam the player mechanism.

•

SEEK Button

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the

CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning

of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the

previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK

button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in

CD and MP3 modes.

RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert

a second CD if one is already loaded.

Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the

other side is a CD) should not be used, and they

can cause damage to the player.

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

TIME Button

Press this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,

the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will

begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or

another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button

works in a similar manner.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243

AM/FM Button

Supported Media (Disc Types)

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

compact disc in random order to provide an interesting Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

change of pace.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-

mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-

domly selected track.

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-

dom Play.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

•

Maximum number of folder levels: 8

Maximum number of files: 255

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3

file recording media and formats are limited. When

writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-

tions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•

Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.

names and folder names is limited. For large numbers Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal

of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

display the file name and folder name and will assign Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after

a number instead. With a maximum number of files, writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of

exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in

200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this longer disc loading times.

display.)

Supported MP3 File Formats

•

Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-

sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3

•

Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-

extension may cause playback problems. The radio is

designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will

character extension)

Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- not play the file.

character extension)

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to

an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the

following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files

use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

VBR bit rates.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245

Playback of MP3 Files

MPEG Specifi-

cation

Sampling Fre-

quency (kHz)

Bit Rate (kbps)

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the

radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium

contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more

time to start playing the MP3 files.

320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32

160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,

16, 8

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected

by the following:

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3

24, 22.05, 16

•

Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title

are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not

supported by the radios.

Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

Number of files and folders - Loading times will

increase with more files and folders

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not

supported.

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended

to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a

single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option

before writing to the disc.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders to return to Љelapsed timeЉ display.

on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which

folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will

allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an

begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the

MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s

next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain

audio system to amplify the source and play through the

playable files).

vehicle speakers.

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-

INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

iary device if the AUX jack is connected.

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through

the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File

Name, and Folder Name (if available).

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the

device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio

is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the

Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume

timeЉ priority mode.

down.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or

more and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

radio UCI feature, refer to the separate RER, REN, RBZ,

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The RB2 or REZ User’s Manual. UCI is available only if

time of day will display for five seconds (when the equipped as an option with these radios.

ignition is OFF).

This feature allows an iPod௡ to be plugged into the

Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If

Equipped)

vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using

the provided interface cable.

Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The

Features If Your Vehicle”.

UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod௡ and

iPhone௡ devices. Some iPod௡ software versions may not

fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s

website for software updates.

Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia

(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)

Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”.

NOTE:

•

If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod௡ to this

port does not play the media. For playing an iPod௡,

use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove

compartment on some vehicles).

UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) 0.5 —

IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/

REL/RET radios only with uconnect™. For sales code

RER, RBZ, REN, REP, REW, RB2 or REZ touch-screen

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•

Connecting an iPod௡ to the AUX port located in the

radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI

feature to control the connected device.

•

If the iPod௡ battery is completely discharged, it may

not communicate with the UCI system until a mini-

mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod௡ connected

to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.

Connecting The iPodா

Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod௡ to Using This Feature

the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in By using the provided connection cable to connect an

the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the iPod௡ to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:

iPod௡ is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI

•

The iPod௡ audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound

system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,

etc.) information on the radio display.

system (iPod௡ may take a few seconds to connect), the

iPod௡ starts charging and is ready for use by pressing

radio switches, as described below.

•

The iPod௡ can be controlled using the radio buttons to

Play, Browse, and List the iPod௡ contents.

NOTE:

•

It may be necessary to remove the connector pin

protection cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to

connecting the cable.

The iPod௡ battery charges when plugged into the UCI

connector (if supported by the specific iPod௡ device)

Controlling The iPodா Using Radio Buttons

To get into the UCI (iPod௡) mode and access a connected

iPod௡, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249

Once in the UCI (iPod௡) mode, iPod௡ audio tracks (if

available from iPod௡) start playing over the vehicle’s

audio system.

•

Jump backward in the current track by pressing and

holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW

button long enough will jump to the beginning of

the current track.

Play Mode

•

Jump forward in the current track by pressing and

holding the FF >> button.

A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will

jump backward or forward respectively, for five

seconds.

Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the

previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is

pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will

jump to the previous track in the list; pressing this

button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the

beginning of the track. Pressing the SEEK >> button

during play mode, it will jump to the next track in the

list.

When switched to UCI mode, the iPod௡ automatically

starts Play mode. In Play mode, use the following buttons

on the radio faceplate to control the iPod௡ and display

data:

•

Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or

previous track.

•

Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while

playing a track, skips to the next track.

Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one

click, during the first two seconds of the track, will

jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this

button at any other time in the track, will jump to

the beginning of the current track.

•

While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see

the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps List Or Browse Mode

to the next screen of data for that track. Once all During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described

screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables

will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.

scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the

iPod௡.

•

Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod௡

mode to repeat the current playing track.

•

TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions

in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod௡.

Press the SCAN button to use iPod௡ scan mode, which

will play the first five seconds of each track in the

current list and then forward to the next song. To stop

SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when

it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.

During Scan mode, pressing the << SEEK and SEEK

>> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.

•

Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-

wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying

the track detail on the radio display. Once the track

to be played is highlighted on the radio display,

press the TUNE control knob to select and start

playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob

fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast

scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on

the radio display may be noticed.

•

RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):

Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and

Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod௡. If the RND icon is

showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is

ON.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251

•

During all List modes, the iPod௡ displays all lists in

“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the

bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards

(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.

•

To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the

same PRESET button again to go back to Play

mode.

•

LIST button: The LIST button will display the top

level menu of the iPod௡. Turn the TUNE control knob

to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the

TUNE control knob. This will display the next sub-

menu list item on the iPod௡ then follow the same steps

to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod௡

sub-menu levels are available on this system.

In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as

shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod௡.

•

Preset 1 – Playlists

Preset 2 – Artists

Preset 3 – Albums

Preset 4 – Genres

Preset 5 – Audiobooks

Preset 6 – Podcasts

MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is

another shortcut button to the genre listing on your

iPod௡.

•

Pressing a PRESET button will display the current

list on the top line and the first item in that list on

the second line.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF

EQUIPPED (REN/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY)

CAUTION!

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-

ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to

coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite

Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,

sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-

dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

•

Leaving the iPod௡ (or any supported device) any-

where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can

alter the operation or damage the device. Follow

the device manufacturer’s guidelines.

Placing items on the iPod௡, or connections to the

iPod௡ in the vehicle, can cause damage to the

device and/or to the connectors.

NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has

limited coverage in Alaska.

WARNING!

System Activation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you

may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio

service that is included with the factory-installed satellite

radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-

come kit that contains general information, including

how to setup your on-line listening account. For further

Do not plug in or remove the iPod௡ while driving.

Failure to follow this warning could result in an

accident.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253

information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number

visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www- display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on

.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

the radio to exit this screen.

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID)

ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios

While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio

Please have the following information available when faceplate.

calling:

Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.

Number (ESN/SID).

Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode

2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

Press the SAT button until ЉSATЉ appears in the display. A

CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio

mode.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SID Access With RES Radios

Satellite Antenna

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-

tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll

using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is

selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the

roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects

placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause

decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia

the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly (Satellite) Mode

on or above the antenna.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

Reception Quality

position to operate the radio.

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the

following reasons:

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next

•

The vehicle is parked in an underground parking channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek

structure or under a physical obstacle.

up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will

remain tuned to the new channel until you make another

selection. Holding either button will bypass channels

without stopping until you release it.

Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the

form of short audio mutes.

Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can

cause intermittent reception.

SCAN Button

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for

Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-

cause signal blockage.

tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN

button a second time.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255

INFO Button

MUSIC TYPE Button

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type

tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button

able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five

additional three seconds will make the radio display the seconds will allow the program format type to be se-

Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return lected.

to normal display).

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music

RW/FF

type.

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the

direction of the arrows.

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type

function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next

channel with the same selected Music Type name.

TUNE Control (Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type

(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be

exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SETUP Button

the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This

following items:

allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into

pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2

memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton

twice.

•

Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/

SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This

number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the

Sirius subscription.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a channel that you wish to Buttons 1 - 6

commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you

The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel

Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If

and press and release that button. If a button is not

Equipped)

selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-

Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The

ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be

Features Of Your Vehicle”.

stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257

KICKERா HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM any stereo audio source. A new feature of the KICKER௡

WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) – audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound

IF EQUIPPED

for any audio source.

“Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers

for any audio source. This surround effect is available for

audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or

AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable

Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel”.

DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio

Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the

front seat occupants. The “Video Surround” mode is

described unde rDriver-Selectable Surround (DSS). The

Video Surround Mode will only be available for video

Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio

amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media

supported by the radio). Some audio will sound better in

DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.

When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set auto-

matically. Fader control is available to add more sur-

round audio if desired.

VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF

EQUIPPED

The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ in-

cludes the following components for rear seat entertain-

ment:

Opening the Rear Seat VES™

•

A diagonal 7 in (17.8 cm) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

screen integrated into the center console armrest. The

screen features brightness control for optimum day-

time and nighttime viewing.

•

The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest

to allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259

•

A battery-powered infrared remote control snaps into

a molded compartment in the center console armrest

upper storage bin.

VES™ Video Screen

NOTE: Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been

raised to its viewing position.

VES™ Remote Control

•

The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow

front seat operation for easy setup in the case of

younger rear seat passengers.

•

Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen-

gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks) Kickerா Mobile Surround (KMS1)ா – If Equipped

on the rear of the center console enable The VES™ for this vehicle comes equipped with Kicker

the monitor to display video directly Mobile Surround (KMS1).௡ This feature offers the ulti-

from a video camera, connect video mate movie experience by providing surround sound

games for display on the screen, or uniquely equalized for the interior space of your vehicle.

play music directly from an MP3

The KMS1௡ Video Surround mode activates whenever a

player.

video source is selected, unless the system is already in

1. Video in (yellow)

“Audio Surround” mode. DSS modes for video sources

are “Stereo,” “Audio Surround,” and “Video Surround.”

When in Video Surround mode, balance and fade are set

automatically by the KMS1௡ system to provide the

ultimate surround sound experience.

2. Left audio in (white)

3. Right audio in (red)

NOTE: Refer to your “Vehicle Entertainment System

(VES)™ Users Manual” for detailed operating instruc-

tions.

REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the

surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock

positions.

NOTE: Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia” section of

Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further

details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261

The VOLUME button controls the sound level

of the sound system. Press the top of the

VOLUME button to increase the sound level.

Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to

decrease the sound level.

VOLUME

Button

Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the

Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen

displays radio and media mode information

depending on which radio is in the vehicle.

AUDIO

MODE

Button

Remote Sound System Controls

If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed

when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the

mode will change (i.e. from AM to FM, to Media mode,

etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).

Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons

are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive

display which is located in the instrument cluster.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/ CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following

button to operate various radio, media, and precautions:

Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions

(i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to

or start playing songs in playlists, etc., depend-

FUNCTION

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the

surface.

SELECT

Button

ing on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,

UCI).

wiping from center to edge.

When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/ 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-

Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek ing the disc.

up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters,

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,

files, etc., depending on which radio is in the

or anti-static sprays.

SCROLL

Button

vehicle.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become

too high.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- Automatic Temperature Control

lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective

coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)

oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known

good disc before considering disc player service.

RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES

Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in

your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from

your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated

by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition

is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance

does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the

antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be

turned down or off during cellular phone operation.

Automatic Temperature Controls

Automatic Operation

The Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically

maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the

comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The air conditioning and heating system is designed to

make you comfortable in all types of weather.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning 72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum

the mode control knob (on the right) to AUTO, and place comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.

the blower control knob (on the left) to either LO AUTO

NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any

or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for

time without affecting automatic operation.

front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should

be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat

occupants are present. Then, dial in the temperature you

would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver

Air conditioning in this system is automatic.

Pressing the air conditioning control button while

in AUTO mode will cause the indicator in the

or passenger temperature control knob. Once the comfort control button to flash three times and then turn off. This

level is selected, the system will maintain that level indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and request-

automatically using the heating system. Should the de- ing the air conditioning is not necessary.

sired comfort level require air conditioning, the system

The system will automatically control recircu-

will automatically make the adjustment.

lation. However, pressing the recirculation con-

trol button will temporarily put the system in

Recirculation mode (10 minutes). This can be

You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply

allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting

the OFF position on the fan control stops the system used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust,

completely and closes the outside air intake.

or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will

cause the indicator in the control button to illuminate.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265

After 10 minutes, the system will return to normal AUTO Manual Operation

mode function and the indicator will turn off.

This system offers a full complement of manual override

features, which consist of blower preferred automatic,

mode preferred automatic, or blower and mode preferred

automatic. This means the operator can override the

blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower

range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.

The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by

rotating the blower control knob (on the left).

NOTE:

•

The surface of the climate control panel and the top

center of the instrument panel should be kept free of

debris due to the location of the climate control

sensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor

operation of this system.

•

Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows

to fog. If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press

the recirculation button to return to outside air. Some

temp/humidity conditions will cause captured inte-

rior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility.

For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation

to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode.

Attempting to use the recirculation while in these

modes will cause the indicator in the control button to

blink and then turn off.

NOTE:

•

For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate

controls will not function during Remote Start opera-

tion if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)

position.

•

Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Op-

eration Chart that follows for details.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267

The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to

change airflow distribution by rotating the mode control

knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.

•

Bi-Level

Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-

ment panel and through the outlets located on the

floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the

center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers

can be closed to block airflow.

•

Defrost

Air is directed to the windshield through the

outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also

directed to the front door windows through the side

window demister grilles.

•

Panel

Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-

ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the

•

Defrost/Floor

back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.

These registers can be closed to block airflow.

Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets

and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is

also directed to the front door windows through the

•

Air Conditioning Control

side window demister grilles.

Floor

Air flows through the floor outlets located under

the instrument panel and into the rear seating area

through vents under the front seats.

Press this button to turn on the air conditioning

during manual operation only. When the air con-

ditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will

•

flow through the outlets selected with the mode control

dial. Press this button a second time to turn off the air

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

conditioning. An indicator in the button illuminates Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes

when manual compressor operation is selected.

will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and

then turn off.

NOTE: To control the air conditioning manually, the

mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position. Operating Tips

•

Recirculation Control NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for

This button can be used to block out smoke, suggested control settings for various weather condi-

odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling tions.

is desired. The Recirculation mode should only

Summer Operation

be used temporarily. An indicator in the button

The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles

illuminates when the Recirculation mode is active. You

may use this feature separately.

must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant

to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect

NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene

windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.

fog, press the recirculation button to return to outside air. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your

Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.

interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil-

ity. For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation

to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269

Winter Operation

NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for

Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months long periods, as fogging may occur.

is not recommended because it may cause window

fogging.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the

windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves

collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they

enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In

Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,

slush, and snow.

Vacation Storage

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service

(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air

conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the

fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure

adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility

of compressor damage when the system is started again.

A/C Air Filter — If Equipped

The climate control system filters outside air containing

dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be

totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in

Section 7 for filter replacement instructions.

Window Fogging

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-

moved by turning the mode selector to defrost. The

Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear

windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-

dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but

rainy or humid weather.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Ⅵ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

▫ Keyless Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 283

▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below Ϫ20°F Or

Ϫ29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual

Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 285

▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Ⅵ Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 280 Ⅵ AutoStick௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

272 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Ⅵ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 300

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Ⅵ Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Ⅵ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Ⅵ Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Ⅵ Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Ⅵ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 301

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 301

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . 302

▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And

ESP/TCS Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Ⅵ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 311

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 312

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 313

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 273

Ⅵ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Ⅵ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 326

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 319 Ⅵ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Ⅵ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Ⅵ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 324

▫ Tire Rotation – Standard Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 325

▫ 6.1L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

▫ E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 334

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

▫ Tire Rotation – All Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . 325 Ⅵ Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

274 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Ⅵ Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Ⅵ Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Ⅵ Recreational Towing

(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 340

▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 340

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 275

STARTING PROCEDURES

CAUTION!

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the

inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if

present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat

belts.

Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-

ing precautions are not observed:

•

Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to

a complete stop.

Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the

vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine

is at idle speed.

Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL

into any forward gear when the engine is above

idle speed.

Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly on the brake pedal.

WARNING!

•

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in

the ignition switch. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

•

Automatic Transmission

Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)

The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK

position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes

before shifting into any driving gear.

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm

engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the

accelerator pedal.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

276 STARTING AND OPERATING

Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Installing and Removing the ENGINE

Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START START/STOP Button

position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The

starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage

Installing the Button

automatically when the engine is running. If the engine 1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.

fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in

2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the

10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the

ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.

LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the

“Normal Starting” procedure.

3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into

position.

Keyless Go™

This feature allows the driver to oper- Removing the Button

ate the ignition switch with the push

of a button, as long as the ENGINE

START/STOP button is installed and

1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed

from the ignition switch for key fob use.

the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans- 2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the

mitter is in the passenger compart- chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the

ment.

button loose.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 277

NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE

be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK START/STOP Button

position (OFF position for Keyless Go™).

1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release

Normal Starting

the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button

2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/

engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle

accelerator pedal.

speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine

will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in

the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the

button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift

lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP

button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will

display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine

will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the

PARK position, or it could roll.

To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or

NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press-

ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system

takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle

fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after

10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine

prior to the engine starting, press the button again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

278 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN

(engine not running) position and the transmission is in

PARK, the system will automatically time out after

60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the

OFF position.

•

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time

to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC

displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).

Extreme Cold Weather (Below Ϫ20°F or Ϫ29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of

an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-

able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

Keyless Go™ Functions – With Driver’s Foot OFF

the Brake Pedal Pedal (In PARK or NEUTRAL

Position)

The Keyless Go™ feature operates similar to an ignition

switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and START.

To change the ignition switch positions without starting

the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

•

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into

the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to

start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire

causing serious personal injury.

•

Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:

•

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to

change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC

displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),

(Continued)

•

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time

to change the ignition switch to the RUN position

(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 279

and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all

the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the

ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor

will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then

disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal

and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat

the “Normal Starting” procedure.

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get

it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic

transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned

fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once

the engine has started, ignite and damage the

converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-

charged battery, booster cables may be used to

obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery

in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-

gerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Start-

ing” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further

information.

Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With

Integrated Key)

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-

dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push

the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and

release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor

will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this

occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then

repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

Clearing a Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE

START/STOP Button)

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold WeatherЉ proce-

dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

280 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

WARNING!

To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-

onds before trying again.

Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.

Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause

electrocution.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will

decrease as the engine warms up.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CAUTION!

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits

quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a

Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-

ing precautions are not observed:

standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with

grounded, three-wire extension cord.

•

Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to

a complete stop.

•

Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the

vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine

is at idle speed.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on

the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that

is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power

Module.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 281

General Information

The automatic transmission selects individual gears au-

tomatically, dependent upon:

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL

into any forward gear when the engine is above

idle speed.

Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly on the brake pedal.

•

Altitude

Vehicle loading

Driving style

Shift lever position

Accelerator position

Vehicle speed

WARNING!

It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle

speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,

the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in

reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when the

engine is idling normally and when your right foot is

firmly on the brake pedal.

The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, de-

pendent on the driving style, the driving situation, and

the road characteristics.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

282 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK

•

After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK

allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating, position, the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before

especially when the engine is cold. the shift lock will release.

•

If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the

the ignition switch to the LOCK position (OFF position engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.

with Keyless Go™) before restarting. Transmission Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The

engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift

restart if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.

position (OFF position with Keyless Go™) first.

•

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the

break-in period. This is a normal condition, and pre-

cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 283

This may result in a slightly different feeling or response

during normal operation in DRIVE position. After the

transmission cools down, it will return to normal

operation.

WARNING!

Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always

shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key fob

from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once

the key fob is removed from the ignition, the shift

lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the

vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore,

you should never leave unattended children inside a

vehicle.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-

lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK

prior to rotating the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition

when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and

once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock (BTSI) system that holds the shift lever in the

PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK

position (OFF position with Keyless Go™). To move the

shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch

Over-Temperature Mode

The transmission electronics constantly monitor the

transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds

normal operating temperature, the transmission will

change the way it shifts to help control the condition.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

284 STARTING AND OPERATING

must be turned to the ON or START position (engine is

running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override

There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move

the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical

system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access

the override, remove the rubber tray from the storage bin

located to the right of the shift lever. The override access

port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever

gate.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position

(RUN position with Keyless Go™) without starting the

engine.

Interlock Manual Override

5. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.

2. Firmly set the parking brake.

6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 7. Reinstall the override cover.

4. Using the screwdriver, press and hold the override tab

through the access port on the center console.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 285

With Keyless Go™

If the engine is running, press the START/STOP button to

turn it off. Release the brake pedal and press the START/

STOP button once or twice to go to the ACC or RUN

position. Do not start the engine. Then, follow the in-

structions shown above to activate the override.

Five-Speed Automatic Transmission

Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be

done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the

vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake

pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.

Shift Lever

Gear Ranges

PARK

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the

transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply

the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

286 STARTING AND OPERATING

When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the

PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.

•

When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the

way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated.

When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking

brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise

the load on the transmission locking mechanism may

make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As

an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the

curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an

uphill grade.

Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument

panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.

CAUTION!

Damage to the shift lever could result if the shift

lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition

switch is turned from the LOCK (OFF position with

Keyless Go™) to the ON position (RUN position

with Keyless Go™).

WARNING!

Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully

when parked to guard against vehicle movement and

possible injury or damage.

REVERSE

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only

after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that

you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 287

NEUTRAL

DRIVE

This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro- This range should be used for most city and highway

longed periods with engine running. Engine may be driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-

started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must shifts and the best fuel economy.

leave the vehicle.

The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth

gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving

characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

CAUTION!

Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason

with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in

transmission damage.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using

the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle

under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel-

ing into strong head winds, or while towing heavy

trailers, use the AutoStick௡ mode and select the “3”

range.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the

ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe

practices that limit your response to changing traffic

or road conditions. You might lose control of the

vehicle and have an accident.

Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures

During cold temperature operation, you may notice

delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

288 STARTING AND OPERATING

temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im- 1. Stop the vehicle.

proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to

2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.

achieve maximum efficiency.

3. Turn the engine off.

Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode

The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions. 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

If a condition is detected that could result in transmission

damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.

5. Restart the engine.

If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no 6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the

longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in problem is no longer detected, the transmission will

the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission return to normal operation.

will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-

brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK,

mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your

REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Sec-

earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has

ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The “Mal-

diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could

function Indicator Light (MIL)” may be illuminated.

recur.

A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be

Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer

driven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset the

as soon as possible.

transmission, use the following procedure:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 289

If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can NOTE:

be reset to regain all forward gears.

•

In AutoStick௡ mode, the transmission will shift up and

down when the driver manually moves the shift lever

right (D+) or left (D-).

AUTOSTICKா

AutoStick௡ is a driver-interactive transmission that offers

manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of

the vehicle. AutoStick௡ allows you to maximize engine

braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,

and improve overall vehicle performance. This system

can also provide you with more control during passing,

city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,

trailer towing, and many other situations.

•

An “UPSHIFT” message will appear in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of the in-

strument cluster when using AutoStick௡. This message

appears in order to alert the driver to upshift to the

next gear. The “UPSHIFT”message will display while

operating the vehicle at higher engine revolutions per

minute (RPM).

You can shift in or out of the AutoStick௡ mode at any

time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.

When you wish to engage AutoStick௡, simply move the

shift lever to the right (D+) or left (D-) while in the DRIVE

position. The transmission will remain in the current gear

until an upshift or downshift is chosen. When you wish

to disengage AutoStick௡, hold the shift lever to the right

Operation

By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, it can be

moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select

a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the shift lever to

the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an

upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument

cluster on the transmission range indicator.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

290 STARTING AND OPERATING

for at least one second. The transmission will now

operate automatically, shifting between the five available

gears.

•

Transmission shifting will be more crisp/abrupt when

AutoStick௡ is engaged.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

General Information

Acceleration

•

You can start out in first or second gear. The system

will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle

speed.

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-

pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati-

cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when

there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear

(driving) wheels.

•

The transmission will automatically downshift to first

gear when coming to a stop.

Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy

conditions.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.

Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear

wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and

possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and

carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction

(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).

Avoid using speed control when AutoStick௡ is en-

gaged.

The transmission will automatically shift up when

maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick௡ is

engaged.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 291

Traction

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Driving through water more than

few inches/

wedge of water to build up between the tire and road centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure

surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping

ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-

Flowing/Rising Water

tions should be observed:

WARNING!

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are

slushy.

Do not drive on or across a road or path where water

is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.

ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface

and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.

Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry

your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this

warning may result in injuries that are serious or

fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become

visible.

4. Keep tires properly inflated.

5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden

stop.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

292 STARTING AND OPERATING

Shallow Standing Water

CAUTION! (Continued)

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through

shallow standing water, consider the following Caution

and Warning before doing so.

•

Driving through standing water may cause dam-

age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-

ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,

transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination

(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)

after driving through standing water. Do not con-

tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears

contaminated, as this may result in further dam-

age. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

•

Always check the depth of the standing water

before driving through it. Never drive through

standing water that is deeper than the bottom of

the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.

Determine the condition of the road or the path

that is under water and if there are any obstacles in

the way before driving through the standing wa-

ter.

Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can

cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious

internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving

through standing water. This will minimize wave

effects.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 293

POWER STEERING

WARNING!

The standard power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical

steering capability if power assist is lost.

•

Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph

(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-

ping distances. Therefore, after driving through

standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on

the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.

Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can

cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you

stranded.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will

still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-

tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering

effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during

parking maneuvers.

•

NOTE:

•

Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel

travel are considered normal and do not indicate that

there is a problem with the power steering system.

Failure to follow these warnings may result in

injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your

passengers, and others around you.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

294 STARTING AND OPERATING

•

Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer- Power Steering Fluid Check

ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time. Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined

This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are

does not in any way damage the steering system.

apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-

pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-

rized dealer.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced power steering

assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.

Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering

system as the chemicals can damage your power

steering components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end

of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering

fluid temperature and it should be avoided when

possible. Damage to the power steering pump may

occur.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 295

The foot operated parking brake is located below the

lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the

park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To

release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a

second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake

disengage.

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and

with the engine off to prevent injury from moving

parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do

not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended

power steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated

level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all

surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking

brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the

PARK position.

Parking Brake

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

296 STARTING AND OPERATING

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The

switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in parking brake should always be applied whenever the

the instrument cluster will illuminate.

driver is not in the vehicle.

NOTE:

WARNING!

•

When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-

sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will

flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound

to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake

before attempting to move the vehicle.

•

Never use the PARK position as a substitute for

the parking brake. Always apply the parking

brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle

movement and possible injury or damage.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured.

Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A

child could operate power windows, other con-

trols, or move the vehicle.

•

This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-

plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front

wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away

from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking

brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise

the load on the transmission locking mechanism may

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 297

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING! (Continued)

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic

brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic

systems loses normal capability, the remaining

system will still function. There will be some

loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident

by increased pedal travel during application, greater

pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential

activation of the “Brake Warning Light.”

•

Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake

failure and an accident.

Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-

ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage

or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission

in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to

roll and cause damage or injury.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for

example, repeated brake applications with the engine

OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to

brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required

with the power system operating.

CAUTION!

If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the

parking brake released, a brake system malfunction

is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an

authorized dealer immediately.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

298 STARTING AND OPERATING

Anti-Lock Brake System

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-

vehicle stability and brake performance under most clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose

braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” debris, or panic stops.

the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent

You also may experience the following when the brake

wheel lock-up.

system goes into Anti-lock:

The electronic brake force distribution (EBD) prevents the

•

The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a

short time after the stop),

rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater

control of available braking forces applied to the rear

axle.

•

The clicking sound of solenoid valves,

Brake pedal pulsations, and

When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you

may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some

related motor noises. These noises are the system per-

forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system

A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end

of the stop.

is working properly. This self check occurs each time the These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 299

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent

the natural laws of physics from acting on the

vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering

efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition

of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction

afforded.

The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns,

following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-

planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver

can prevent accidents.

•

The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisti-

cated electronic equipment that may be suscep-

tible to interference caused by improperly in-

stalled or high output radio transmitting

equipment. This interference can cause possible

loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of

such equipment should be performed by qualified

professionals.

Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish

their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.

Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just

press firmly on your brake pedal when you need

to slow down or stop.

•

The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety

or the safety of others.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

300 STARTING AND OPERATING

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is

type and tires must be properly inflated to produce turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon

accurate signals for the computer.

as possible.

Anti-Lock Brake Light

If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock

The “Anti-Lock Brake Light” monitors the anti- Brake Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are

lock brake system. The light will come on when not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is

the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may required.

stay on for as long as four seconds.

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Light” remains on or comes on

while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the

brake system is not functioning and that service is

required. However, the conventional brake system will

continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning

Light” is not on.

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic

brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This

system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), the

Traction Control System (TCS), the Brake Assist System

(BAS), and the Electronic Stability Program (ESP). These

systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability

and control in various driving conditions.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Light” is on, the brake system

should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the

benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 301

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

WARNING!

This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control

under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau-

lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help

avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.

Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and

Operating” for further information.

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics

from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the

traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The

ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-

sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on

very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,

attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner

that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of

others.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each

driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is

applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is

reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

302 STARTING AND OPERATING

Brake Assist System (BAS)

WARNING!

This system complements the ABS by optimizing the

vehicle braking capability during emergency braking

maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking

situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli-

cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.

This can help reduce braking distances.

The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics

from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the

traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The

BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-

sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on

very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,

attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner

that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of

others.

Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS

assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you

must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the

stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure

unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal

is released, the BAS is deactivated.

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

This system enhances directional control and stability of

the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP

corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle

by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 303

power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator

condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the

maintain the desired path.

accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure

to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road

conditions.

The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path

that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares

it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path

does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the

brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting

the condition of oversteer or understeer.

WARNING!

The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics

from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the

traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The

ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those result-

ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very

slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, at-

tentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The

capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never

be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that

could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of

others.

•

Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the

instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the

tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes

active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

304 STARTING AND OPERATING

The ESP system has three available operating modes:

switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illumi-

nate. To turn the ESP ON again, momentarily press the

“ESP OFF” switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”

will turn off.

ESP On

This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever

the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.

This mode should be used for most driving situations. NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving

The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,

as noted in the following paragraphs.

sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the

“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESP

OFF” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”

mode is overcome, turn the ESP ON again by momen-

tarily pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. This may be done

while the vehicle is in motion.

Partial Off

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a

more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also

intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This

mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the

threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more Full Off

wheel spin than what ESP normally allows.

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use

only and should not be used on any public roadways. In

this mode, all TCS and ESP stability features are turned

OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the

“ESP OFF” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is

The “ESP OFF” switch is located in the switch bank near

the top center of the instrument panel. To enter the

“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESP OFF”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 305

stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a

chime will sound, the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will

illuminate, and the ЉESP OFFЉ message will display in the

vehicle odometer. Press and release the TRIP ODOM-

ETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear

this message. The “ESP OFF” message may appear in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-

tion. To turn ESP ON again, momentarily press the “ESP

OFF” switch.

WARNING!

In the ESP “Full Off” mode, the engine torque

reduction and stability features are cancelled. There-

fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is

unavailable.

NOTE: When the ESP is switched OFF, a feature of the

system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin

across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.

If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,

the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel

and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel

that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction

when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in

deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch

to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the

“ESP OFF” switch.

NOTE: The ЉESP OFFЉ message will display and the

audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved

into the PARK position from any position other than

PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This

will occur when the message was previously cleared.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

306 STARTING AND OPERATING

ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and

ESP/TCS Indicator Light

WARNING!

The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is

combined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/

BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” and the

“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument

cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position. They should go out with the engine

running.

With the ESP switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle

stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emer-

gency evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not

engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full

Off” ESP mode is intended for off-highway or off-

road only.

Synchronizing ESP

The system will turn the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indica-

tor Light” on continuously while the engine is running if

it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or

both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles

and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilome-

ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the

ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see

your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the

problem diagnosed and corrected.

The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is

combined with BAS indicator. If the power

supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or

discharged), the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indi-

cator Light” may illuminate with the engine running. If

this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to

the left and then to the right. The “ESP/BAS Malfunction

Indicator Light” should go out. However, if the light

remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 307

NOTE:

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

•

The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS

Tire Markings

Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn on momen-

tarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position.

•

Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, the ESP System will be ON even if it was

turned OFF previously.

The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking

sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds

will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the

maneuver that caused the ESP activation.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-

dards Code (TIN)

2 — Size Designation

3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load

5 — Maximum Pressure

6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

308 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

•

Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact

spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

•

P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

•

European-Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have

the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire

size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded

into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

•

LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-

ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 309

Tire Sizing Chart

Size Designation:

EXAMPLE:

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards

؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards

T = Temporary spare tire

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

— Ratio of section height to section width of tire

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

— ЉRЉ means radial construction

—ЉDЉ means diagonal or bias construction

15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

310 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding

to its load index under certain operating conditions

— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under

specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and

posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire

Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire

Light Load = Light load tire

C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for

this tire

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 311

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on

however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard

with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the side of the tire.

date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire

safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

—03 means the 3rd week.

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

—01 means the year 2001

— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the

year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

312 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Term

Definition

B-Pillar

The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located

between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running

from the sill to the roof.

Cold Tire Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the

vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less

than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation

pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or

KPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold

tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is

molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Inflation Pressure

Tire Placard

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as

shown on the tire placard.

A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the

vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the

recommended inflation pressure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 313

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed

on the driver’s side B-Pillar.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about

the:

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle

2) total weight your vehicle can carry

Tire Placard Location

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

314 STARTING AND OPERATING

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed

the weight referenced here.

3) tire size designed for your vehicle

4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and

spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed

the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you

adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section

of this manual.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”

on your vehicle’s placard.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to

“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-

sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 315

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:

cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”

amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five

150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs

(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs

[295 kg]).

•

The following table shows examples on how to calcu-

late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities

of your vehicle with varying seating configurations

and number and size of occupants. This table is for

illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for

the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

•

For the following example, the combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

316 STARTING AND OPERATING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 317

Safety

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and

increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the

recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never

overload them.

•

Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause accidents.

Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-

sult in over-heating and tire failure.

Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion

shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can

cause damage that result in tire failure.

Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-

lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect

vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting

in loss of vehicle control.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary

areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

•

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver’s side “B” Pillar.

WARNING! (Continued)

Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-

hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to

the right or left.

Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

mended cold tire inflation pressure.

•

Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure

Information for vehicle loads that are less than the

maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-

ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure

Information” section of this manual.

Economy

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear

patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal

wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for

earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases

tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel

consumption.

The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as

inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least

once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to

check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement

when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look

properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable

ride.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 319

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in

the Winter.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,

which could damage the valve stem.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the

outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),

which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this

outside temperature condition.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure

is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than

1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire

inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-

tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure

build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds

within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-

tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high

speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very

important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range

of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with

temperature changes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

320 STARTING AND OPERATING

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires

tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire

dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading

and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires

on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle

poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-

ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never

combine them with other types of tires.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-

mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your

tires could cause them to fail. You could have a

serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the

maximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in

the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your

authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not

spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)

or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without

stopping when you are stuck.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 321

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-

age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-

one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds

continuously when you are stuck, and do not let

anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the

speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires

to help you in determining when your tires should be

replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the

tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

322 STARTING AND OPERATING

Life of Tire

Replacement Tires

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many

factors including, but not limited to:

characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-

facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-

lent to the originals in size, quality and performance

when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on

“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading

Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.

The service description and load identification will be

found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use

equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the

safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend

that you contact your original equipment or an autho-

rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire

specifications or capability.

•

Driving style

Tire pressure

Distance driven

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six

years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to

follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have an accident resulting

in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little

exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact

with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 323

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire

failure and loss of vehicle control.

•

Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than

that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations

of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-

pension dimensions and performance characteris-

tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and

braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-

able handling and stress to steering and suspen-

sion components. You could lose control and have

an accident resulting in serious injury or death.

Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings

approved for your vehicle.

Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity, other than what was originally equipped

on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load

index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have an accident.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size

may result in false speedometer and odometer read-

ings.

SNOW TIRES

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires

during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type

and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S

designation on the tire sidewall.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

324 STARTING AND OPERATING

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with

in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type

safety and handling of your vehicle.

tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain

mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a

smooth, quiet ride.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what

was originally equipped with your vehicle and should

not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-

(120 km/h).

nance intervals. Remember, more frequent rotation is

permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or

unusual wear should be corrected prior to performing

the tire rotation.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at

different loads and perform different steering, driving,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

unequal rates.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 325

Tire Rotation – Standard Tires

Tire Rotation – All Season Tires

The suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side” as The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped

shown in the following diagram.

with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in

the following diagram.

Tire Rotation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

326 STARTING AND OPERATING

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning

driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects

mended cold placard pressure.

and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire

1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn

when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended

will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-

on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-

pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the

three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a three recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM

hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically

exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the

tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle

“Starting and Operating” for information on how to may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-

also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and tion.

there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-

sure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 327

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended

cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure

of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F

(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),

a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire

pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire

pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM

Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire

pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the

TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the

TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are

inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-

sure value.

CAUTION!

•

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system

operation or sensor damage may result when us-

ing replacement equipment that is not of the same

size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can

cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire

sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is

equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors

may result.

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,

always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will

prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve

stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

328 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

•

Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in

the tire.

•

The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care

and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure

or condition.

Premium System

•

The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless

while adjusting your tire pressure.

technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to

monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each

wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure

readings to the receiver module.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

stopping ability.

tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

•

The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components:

correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure

gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.

•

Receiver module,

Four TPM sensors,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 329

•

Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and

TPM Telltale Light.

The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if

equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be

used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a

pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the

TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the

instrument cluster and a chime will sound when

tire pressure is low in one or more of the four

active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or

more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right

Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic

showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire

pressure values flashing.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible

and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those

flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recom-

mended cold placard pressure inflation value. Once the

system receives the updated tire pressures, the system

will automatically update, the graphic display in the

EVIC will stop flashing, and the TPM Telltale Light will

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

330 STARTING AND OPERATING

turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to

20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the

TPMS to receive this information.

Check TPMS Warning

If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will

flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the

EVIC will display a ЉCHECK TPM SYSTEMЉ message for

three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the

pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being

received.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,

providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault

no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer

flash, and the ЉCHECK TPM SYSTEMЉ message will no

longer display, and a pressure value will display in place

of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the

following:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 331

1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic

next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as showing the low tire pressure value flashing.

the TPM sensors.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains 15 mph (25 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF,

materials that may block radio wave signals.

as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure

warning limit in any of the four active road tires.

3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or

wheel housings.

Vehicles with Compact Spare

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.

Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the

compact spare tire.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

Vehicles with Full Size Spare

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road

1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning

has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.

limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM

Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In

addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a

flashing pressure value.

2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire

that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,

upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound

and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

332 STARTING AND OPERATING

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The

15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this

addition, the EVIC will display a ЉCHECK TPM SYS- information.

TEMЉ message for three seconds and then display dashes

(- -) in place of the pressure value.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for following conditions:

75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will

•

This device may not cause harmful interference.

display a ЉCHECK TPM SYSTEMЉ message for three

seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the

pressure value.

This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-

the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the ing licenses:

TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the

EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes

(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure

United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123

Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 333

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

6.1L Engine

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and

endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-

wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties

necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,

and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-

mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-

fications, if they are available.

The 6.1L engine is designed to meet all

emissions regulations and provide excel-

lent fuel economy and performance when

using high-quality premium unleaded

gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or

higher.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner

burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-

cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-

prove air quality.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to

your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at

high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is

required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such

as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-

ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-

before considering service for the vehicle.

line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-

vide excellent performance and durability of engine and

fuel system components.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-

genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen- ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol

ates are required in some areas of the country during the content may void the vehicle’s warranty.

winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85

Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in

fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

your vehicle.

•

operate in a lean mode

CAUTION!

OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on

poor engine performance

DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85

Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting

and driveability problems and may damage critical

fuel system components.

poor cold start and cold driveability

increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with

E85 perform the following:

Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or

E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the

manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from

methanol, it does not have the negative effects of

Methanol.

•

drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)

change the engine oil and oil filter

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 335

•

disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether

engine controller memory

the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to

look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT

can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the

United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-

nia reformulated gasoline.

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged

exposure to E85 fuel.

MMT In Gasoline

MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline

blended with MMT provides no performance advantage

beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug

life and reduces emissions system performance in some

vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline

without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content

of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,

Materials Added to Fuel

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to

contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional

detergents or other additives is not needed under normal

conditions and they would result in additional cost.

Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the

fuel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

The use of fuel additives, which are now being

sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.

Most of these products contain high concentra-

tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle

performance problems resulting from the use of

such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of

the manufacturer.

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s

performance:

•

The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.

Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-

mance and damage the emissions control system.

An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to

overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or

some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune

or malfunctioning and may require immediate

service. Contact your authorized dealer for service

assistance.

•

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-

trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 337

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Guard against carbon monoxide with proper

maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected

every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-

mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,

drive with all side windows fully open.

Keep the liftgate/trunk closed when driving your

vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other

poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon

monoxide poisoning:

•

Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can

kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as

a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for an extended period. If the

vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine

running for more than a short period, adjust the

ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into

the vehicle.

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the

left side of the vehicle. If so equipped, use the finger pull

to open the door. Otherwise, push in on the left side (near

the edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap.

If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement

cap is for use with this vehicle.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap

tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door

reinforcement.

CAUTION!

•

Damage to the fuel system or emissions control

system could result from using an improper fuel

tank filler tube cap (gas cap).

•

A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into

the fuel system.

A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top

off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel

nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

Gas Cap Tether Hook

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 339

•

When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel

tank is full.

WARNING!

•

Never have any smoking materials lit in or near

the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the

tank filled.

Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is

running.

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You

could be burned. Always place gas containers on

the ground while filling.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel

filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this

occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the

TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the

problem continues, the message will appear the next time

the vehicle is started.

•

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap

may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic

System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information.

NOTE:

Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.

•

This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened

properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn

on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure

that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is

refueled.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

340 STARTING AND OPERATING

VEHICLE LOADING

•

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Type of Vehicle

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on

the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information

should be used for passenger and luggage loading as

indicated.

Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total

load must be limited so that you do not exceed the

GVWR.

Vehicle Certification Label

Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to

the rear of the driver’s door.

The label contains the following information:

•

Name of manufacturer

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear

axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles

evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or

rear GAWR.

Month and year of manufacture

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING AND OPERATING 341

Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle

separately. It is important that you distribute the load

evenly over the front and rear axles.

WARNING!

Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is

important that you do not exceed the maximum front

or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can

result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose

control of the vehicle and have an accident.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and

shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension

components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s

GVWR.

Overloading

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty

weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items

down low and be sure you distribute their weight as

evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before

driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you

have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within

the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.

Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect

on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way

the brakes operate.

The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,

wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory

service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the

front and rear GAWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of your

vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for

operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that

it is not over the GVWR.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

342 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

WARNING!

•

Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the

rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and

GAWRs.

If the driveshaft is removed, the vehicle can roll even

if the transmission is in PARK, which could cause

serious injury or death.

•

Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper

tire pressure.

The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the

wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa-

tion. The parking brake must remain engaged unless the

vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow

vehicle, or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled. See

your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal

and reinstallation procedures, including flange

orientation/alignment, use of thread-locking compound,

proper bolt torque specifications, etc.

TRAILER TOWING

Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft

is removed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground

while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe

transmission damage.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Ⅵ If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Ⅵ Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Ⅵ TIREFIT Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Ⅵ Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . 346

▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

▫ Sealing a Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Ⅵ Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

▫ Without The Ignition Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . 360

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the may wear down your battery.

center of the instrument panel between the center air

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the

potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-

tion.

outlets.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional

turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming

traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to

turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.

•

On the highways — slow down.

In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission

in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle

speed.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not

be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for

other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even

though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345

to high. This allows the heater core to act as a

supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat

from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage

your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F

(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle

the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until

the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–

230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F

(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the

engine off immediately and call for service.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down

an impending overheat condition:

TIREFIT KIT

•

If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C

system adds heat to the engine cooling system and

turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

Small punctures up to ¹⁄4” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be

sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or

nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can

be used in outside temperatures down to approximately

-4°F (-20°C).

You can also turn the temperature control to maximum

heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you TIREFIT Kit Components and Operation

to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a

maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/hr).

TIREFIT Storage

The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk.

1. Sealant Bottle

2. Deflation Button — If Equipped

3. Pressure Gauge

TIREFIT Location

4. Power Button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347

5. Mode Select Knob

Selecting Sealant Mode

Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this

position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant

and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant

Hose (clear hose with the yellow cap)

(6) when selecting this mode.

6. Sealant Hose (Clear with Yellow Cap)

7. Air Pump Hose (Black)

8. Power Plug

Using the Mode Select Knob and Hoses

Your TIREFIT kit may be equipped with either of the

following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.

Using the Power Button

Push and release the Power Button (4) once to

turn ON the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the

Power Button (4) again to turn OFF the TIRE-

FIT kit.

Selecting Air Mode

Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this

position for air pump operation only.

Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7)

when selecting this mode.

Using the Deflation Button — If Equipped

Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air

pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

TIREFIT Usage Precautions

•

You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle

tires. The kit also comes with two needles located in

the Accessory Storage Compartment (located on the

bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,

or like inflatable items. However, use only the Air

Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob

(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to

avoid injecting sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant

is only intended to seal punctures less than ¹⁄4” (6mm)

diameter in the tread of your vehicle.

•

Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant

Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed on the

bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the sys-

tem. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F)

“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.

•

The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) is a one tire

application use. After each use, always immediately

replace these components at an authorized dealer.

When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean

water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from

the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the

sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly

discarded.

Do not lift or carry TIREFIT kit by hoses.

WARNING!

•

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to traffic. Pull far enough off the road

to avoid the danger of being hit when using the

TIREFIT kit.

•

For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem

on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the

TIREFIT kit.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the

following circumstances:

•

A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision

or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the

vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place

provided. Failure to follow these warnings can

result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,

your passengers, and others around you.

Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to

come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIRE-

FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed

through the skin: It causes skin, eye, and respira-

tory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of

water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.

Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any

contact with clothing.

−

If the cut or puncture in the tire tread is approxi-

mately 0.24 in. (6 mm) or larger.

−

If the tire has any sidewall damage.

If the tire has any damage from driving with

extremely low tire pressure.

If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat

tire.

−

If the wheel has any damage.

If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or

the wheel.

Keep TIREFIT away from open flame or heat

source.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the

deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.

This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the

valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground.

This will provide the best positioning of the kit when

injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the

air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the

valve stem in this position before proceeding.

WARNING! (Continued)

TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of

•

allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician im-

mediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.

If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with

plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not

induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-

ately.

Use the gloves provided in the Accessory Storage

Compartment (located on the bottom of the air

pump) when operating the TIREFIT kit.

3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or

in Gear (manual transmission) and turn OFF the ignition.

•

4. Set the parking brake.

(B) Setting Up to Use TIREFIT:

Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT

1. Remove the gloves from the Accessory Storage Com-

partment (located on the bottom of the air pump) and

place them on your hands.

(A) Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn ON the vehicle’s

Hazard Warning flashers.

2. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Sealant Mode

position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351

3. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the

yellow cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.

parking brake engaged and the shifter in NEUTRAL.

4. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the

deflated tire.

•

After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white

fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the

Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.

5. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw

the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in

valve stem. the tire.

6. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and then insert the plug into If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 –

the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):

NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn OFF the TIREFIT

nails) from the tire.

kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.

Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the

Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode

Select Knob (5) is in the sealant mode position and not air

tire:

•

Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE- mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn ON the TIREFIT

FIT kit.

kit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-

power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if avail- ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to

able. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON operate pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indi-

the TIREFIT kit.

3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous

use. Call for assistance.

cated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side latch

pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure

by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).

If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)

pressure within 15 minutes:

NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on air mode and

pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump

Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).

•

The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive

the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the

Sealant Hose (6):

NOTE: If the air pump is equipped with a Deflation

Button and the tire becomes over-inflated, press the

Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the

recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

1. Continue to operate pump until sealant is no longer

flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As

the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the

Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (5 Bar). The

Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approxi-

mately 70 psi (5 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the

Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.

If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at

least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353

2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the (D) Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire:

Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument Immediately after injecting sealant, and inflating tire,

panel.

drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure

distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not

exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).

3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the

valve stem, reinstall the yellow cap on the fitting at the

end of the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle

storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Securing TIRE-

FIT Sealant in the Tire”.

WARNING!

TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the

tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using

TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until

having the tire repaired or replaced. Failure to follow

this warning can result in injuries that are serious or

fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

CAUTION!

•

The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get

hot after use, so should be handled carefully.

Failure to reinstall the yellow cap on the fitting at

the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant

contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s

interior. It can also result in sealant contacting

internal TIREFIT kit components which may

cause permanent damage to the kit.

(E) After Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire:

Follow Step (A) “Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT”

before continuing.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to the Air Mode Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the

position.

2. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) and connect it to the 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem and

valve stem. then reinstall the cap on the valve stem.

3. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the

Gauge (3). vehicle.

recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar) , the tire is too 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the

badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser-

further. Call for assistance.

vice center.

If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:

5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)

assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”

1. Press the Power Button (4) to on and inflate the tire to

the pressure indicated on the tire and loading informa-

tion label on the driver-side door opening.

NOTE: When having the tire serviced advise the autho-

rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed

using the TIREFIT service kit.

NOTE: If the air pump is equipped with a Deflation

Button and the tire becomes over-inflated, press the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355

(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement:

housing. Then, press the bottle into the housing. An

audible click will be heard, indicating the bottle is locked

in place.

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6).

2. Locate the rectangular Sealant Bottle release button in

the recessed area where you place your fingers to unlatch

the hoses (6) (7) from their storage area.

6. Verify the yellow cap is installed on the fitting at the

end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its

storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).

3. Use the yellow cap on end of the Sealant Hose (6) to

depress the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant

Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of

it accordingly.

7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the

vehicle.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-

started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in

another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster

pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly

so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous-

ing.

5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) to the housing so

that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the

front of the housing and the alignment keys on the

bottom of the bottle align with the alignment slots in the

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack

follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and

precautions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing

on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any

other booster source with a system voltage greater

than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,

alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.

It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Preparations for Jump-Start

The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.

Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the

engine compartment for jump-starting.

1 — Remote Negative (-) Post

2 — Remote Positive (+) Post

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357

Remote Battery Posts

WARNING!

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-

cal accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park

the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the

parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

•

Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-

ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the

ignition switch is on. You can be injured by

moving fan blades.

WARNING!

•

Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or

bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical

contact. You could be seriously injured.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your

skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is

flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or

sparks away from the battery.

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this

could establish a ground connection and personal

injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-

sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-

plosion.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission

into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in

damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle

or the discharged vehicle.

Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the

discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark

could cause the battery to explode and could result in

personal injury.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the

remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start

the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in

the reverse sequence:

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the booster battery.

6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the

remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the dis-

charged battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with

the discharged battery.

7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable

from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359

8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it

can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your

steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the

front wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-

VERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelerator pedal

9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable

from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged

vehicle.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spin-

you should have the battery and charging system in- ning the wheels, is most effective.

spected at your authorized dealer.

NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

— if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if

equipped before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic

CAUTION!

Brake Control” in “Starting and Operating” for further

information.

Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle

power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,

even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).

Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s

battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery

life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

WARNING!

•

When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-

tween 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels

faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage

may result.

Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast

may lead to transmission overheating and failure.

It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the

wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no

transmission shifting occurring).

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or

even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could

explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-

cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for

longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

Without The Ignition Key Fob

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed

with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved

method of towing without the ignition key is with a

flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the

Flatbed towing is recommended. DO NOT tow an AWD transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the

vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground unless the ground (or the rear driveshaft removed) with no limita-

rear driveshaft is removed and the transmission is in tion on speed or distance.

NEUTRAL.

CAUTION!

Vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed (with rear

wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEU-

TRAL under the following conditions:

•

Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front

with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the

front fascia will result.

If the transmission is not operative or if the

vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (24 km)

or faster than 30 mph (48 kph), then the only

approved method of towing is with a flatbed

truck. Otherwise, damage to the transmission may

result.

•

The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles

(24 km).

The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

CAUTION!

Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe

transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

•

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to

the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With

A Tow Dolly

The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this

vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.

CAUTION! (Continued)

Do not push or tow this vehicle with another

vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-

mission may result.

•

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)

while being towed, the ignition must be placed in the

RUN position, not the ACC position. Make certain the

transmission remains in NEUTRAL.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Engine Compartment — 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Ⅵ Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 366

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Ⅵ Emissions Inspection And Maintenance

Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Ⅵ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Ⅵ Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Ⅵ Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Ⅵ Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam

Headlamp, And Park/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . 407

▫ Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Lamp, And

Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Ⅵ Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Ⅵ Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 413

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Ⅵ Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 400

Ⅵ Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Ⅵ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.1L

1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)

2 — Integrated Power Module

3 — Coolant Pressure Cap

6 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

7 — Air Cleaner Filter

8 — Engine Oil Fill

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover

5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

9 — Engine Oil Dipstick

10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

CAUTION!

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard

diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors

the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic

transmission control systems. When these systems are

operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent

performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-

sions well within current government regulations.

•

Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

further damage to the emissions control system. It

could also affect fuel economy and driveability.

The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions

tests can be performed.

If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,

severe catalytic converter damage and power loss

will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system

will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It

will also store diagnostic codes and other information to

assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-

though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not

need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as

soon as possible.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel

filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

”gASCAP” message will appear in the odometer or a

“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this

occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367

TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-

problem continues, the message will appear the next time ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not

the vehicle is started.

ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,

may also turn on the MIL.

which you can use prior to going to the test station. To

check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must

do the following:

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass

an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not

crank or start the engine.

2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start

this test over.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-

nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not

on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II

system is ready for testing.

3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON

position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of

a normal bulb check.

4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will

happen:

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II

system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced

return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail

the ignition or start the engine. This means that your your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine

vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should running.

not proceed to the I/M station.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully

illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the

engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system

is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

Use of genuine MOPAR௡ parts for normal/scheduled

maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-

sure the designed performance. Damage or failures

caused by the use of non-MOPAR௡ parts for maintenance

and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s

warranty.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your

authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was

recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

you may need to do nothing more than drive your

vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II

system to update. A recheck with the above test routine

may then indicate that the system is now ready.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-

nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service

operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are

available which include detailed service information for

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before

ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal attempting any procedure yourself.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed

systems may void your warranty and could result in civil maintenance schedule, there are other components which

penalties being assessed against you.

may require servicing or replacement in the future.

WARNING!

CAUTION!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you

have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

•

Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-

form repairs and service when necessary could

result in more costly repairs, damage to other

components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-

mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions

examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC

dealership or qualified repair center.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

(Continued)

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance

services determined by the engineers who designed your

vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a

fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the

engine after it has sat overnight.

CAUTION! (Continued)

Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

•

that protect the performance and durability of

your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance

intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these

components as the chemicals can damage your

engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-

tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed

because of component malfunction, use only the

specified fluid for the flushing procedure.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will

improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain

the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 l) of

oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range

will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range

on these engines.

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or

loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

Change Engine Oil

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must

be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)

intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, SAE 5W-40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operating

whichever occurs first.

temperatures.

Engine Oil Selection

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

For best performance and maximum protection under all engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on

types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-

recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725 information.

and are approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5 (will be listed

on the back label of the oil container).

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-

The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-

5W-40 or equivalent engine oil.

mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes

are followed.

CAUTION!

Materials Added to Engine Oil

Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak

detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engi-

neered product and its performance may be impaired by

supplemental additives.

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the

chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

WARNING!

indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the

environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service

station, or governmental agency for advice on how and

where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in

your area.

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can

provide a measure of protection in the case of engine

backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air

cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary

for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is

near the engine compartment before starting the

vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,

hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter

at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil

filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality

of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high

quality filters should be used to assure most efficient

service. MOPAR௡ engine oil filters are a high quality oil

filter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters

varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373

used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR௡ engine air

cleaner filters are

recommended.

high quality filter and are

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-

tenance required.

NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in

the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the

engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “Jump-

Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for

further information.

Battery Location

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that

should not be disconnected and should only be

replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).

•

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can

burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean

over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid

splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-

diately with large amounts of water.

Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use

a booster battery or any other booster source with

an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

CAUTION!

It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the

positive post and the negative cable is attached to

the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-

tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the

battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the

terminal posts and free of corrosion.

If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in

the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables

before connecting the charger to the battery. Do

not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

•

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands

after handling.

•

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375

Air Conditioner Maintenance

WARNING!

For best possible performance, your air conditioner

should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer

at the start of each warm season. This service should

include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance

test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this

time.

•

Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-

tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are

flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other

unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause

the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to

Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,

for further warranty information.

The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal

injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant

or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning

system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-

tioning components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- the retaining clips.

carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-

ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning

service be performed by authorized dealers or other

service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor

oil, and refrigerants.

A/C Air Filter

The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,

behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger

side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When

installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.

Access Door

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377

2. Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down

and remove the used filter.

A/C Air Filter

Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-

nance intervals.

3. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the

direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the

vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as

seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- Windshield Wiper Blades

cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the

MOPAR௡ Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a

quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-

wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts tions of salt or road film.

concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods

grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be

may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use

removed. Particular attention should also be given to

washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt

hood latching components to ensure proper function.

from a dry windshield.

When performing other underhood services, the hood

latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from

cleaned and lubricated.

the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with

petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a

year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-

amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR௡ ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor

Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the performance of blades may be present with chattering,

lock cylinder.

marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379

present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer

cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in

function.

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).

Adding Washer Fluid

WARNING!

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the

front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the

fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the

reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator

antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to

flush out the residual water.

Commercially available windshield washer solvents

are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care

must be exercised when filling or working around

the washer solution.

Exhaust System

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some

washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper

blades clean. This will help blade performance.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system

in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or

exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This

rating information can be found on most washer fluid

containers.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;

or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;

or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-

haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-

aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams

or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep

into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the

exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-

cation or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING! (Continued)

•

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park

over materials that can burn. Such materials might

be grass or leaves coming into contact with your

exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-

hicle in areas where your exhaust system can

contact anything that can burn.

WARNING!

CAUTION!

•

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and

odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious

and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing

CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things

To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further

information.

The catalytic converter requires the use of un-

leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the

effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-

trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-

formance and cause serious damage to the engine.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.

In the event of engine malfunction, particularly

involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of

performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.

Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe

malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,

resulting in possible damage to the converter and

vehicle.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe

and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop

the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.

Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-

tions, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-

age:

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-

verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-

portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure

proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst

damage.

•

Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,

when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

•

Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the

vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

•

Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires Coolant Checks

disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every

testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where

idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,

flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-

freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any

accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently

spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the

face of the condenser.

WARNING!

•

When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-

connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-

ture controlled and can start at any time the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the

hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has

had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling

system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-

ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection

at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for

leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but

not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for

proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of

engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383

If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-

freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery

bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE

CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

CAUTION!

•

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may

result in engine damage and may decrease corro-

sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant

(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system

in an emergency, it should be replaced with the

specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as

possible.

Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-

tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they

may not be compatible with the radiator engine

coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.

Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a

considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a

reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough

rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly

dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.

Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

Selection of Coolant

Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-

ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-

ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

•

The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR௡

Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula

HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or

equivalent.

CAUTION! (Continued)

This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-

freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

•

Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant

and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to

exceed 70%) if temperatures below Ϫ34°F (Ϫ37°C) are

anticipated.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine

coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance

intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up

to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before

replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-

nance period, it is important that you use the same

engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your

vehicle.

Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-

ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water

will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the

engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-

tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-

cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where

the vehicle is operated.

Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid

Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant

(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385

NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will

decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and

will require more frequent coolant changes.

WARNING!

•

The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on

the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-

caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)

when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or

remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat

causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.

To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the

pressure cap while the system is hot or under

pressure.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine

coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant

(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant

recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-

gine damage may result.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Disposal of Used Coolant

engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant

a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is

with your local authorities to determine the disposal satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- a month.

mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to

engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it

maintain the proper level, it should be added to the

to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child

coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up

any ground spills immediately.

Points to Remember

Coolant Level

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for (kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming

determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-

adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high

engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be- humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-

tween the ranges indicated on the bottle.

ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is

no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no

evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be

safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

•

Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery

bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean.

•

Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the

radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine

coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of

coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against

freezing.

•

Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter

operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may

result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)

performance, poor gas mileage, and increased

emissions.

•

If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are

required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle

does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling Brake System

system should be pressure tested for leaks.

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake

system components should be inspected periodically.

Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at

50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)

and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of

your engine, which contains aluminum components.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing

the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”

mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting

or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. You would not have your full

braking capacity in an emergency.

Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may

cause leaking in the system.

Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-

ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc

brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake

pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a

leak and a checkup may be needed.

Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately

if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-

ure.

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-

fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-

taining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-

forming underhood services.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

•

To avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that

has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the

master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.

Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture

from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.

This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard

or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake

failure. This could result in a accident.

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing

the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also

damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be

taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

•

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid

can severely damage your brake system and/or

impair its performance. The proper type of brake

fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi-

nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder

reservoir.

(Continued)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

•

Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-

•

Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-

facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-

ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque

converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid

other than that recommended by the manufacturer

will result in more frequent fluid and filter

changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-

ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur-

ther information.

The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does

not require adjustment under normal operating

conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,

visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe

damage to the transmission may occur. Your au-

thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the

fluid level accurately.

nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could

be damaged, causing partial or complete brake

failure. This could result in an accident.

Automatic Transmission

Fluid Level Check

Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not

required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.

If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have

your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391

Fluid and Filter Changes

Special Additives

Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered

product and its performance may be impaired by supple-

mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-

tives to the transmission. The only exception to this

If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the

fluid and filter should be changed.

Selection of Lubricant

policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid

It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as

transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor- they may adversely affect seals.

mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis-

CAUTION!

sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-

tained at the prescribed level using the recommended

fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-

mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as

the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-

nents. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Rear Axle

For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not

required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons

the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are

fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-

tion.

nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,

extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-

tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and

underbody protection.

Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the

axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill

hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. The following maintenance recommendations will enable

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

resistance built into your vehicle.

Change Axle Fluid

What Causes Corrosion?

Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of

paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion

The most common causes are:

Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-

graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed

•

Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.

Stone and gravel impact.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393

•

Insects, tree sap, and tar.

•

Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing

that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint

finish.

Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

CAUTION!

Washing

•

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials

such as steel wool or scouring powder that will

scratch metal and painted surfaces.

Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi

(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of

paint and decals.

•

Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-

hicle in the shade using MOPAR௡ Car Wash or a mild

car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with

clear water.

•

If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-

lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR௡ Super Kleen Bug

and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.

Special Care

Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR௡

Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect

your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

•

If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive

near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once

a month.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

•

It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear

and open.

•

Use MOPAR௡ Touch Up Paint or equivalent on

scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer

has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel and Wheel Trim Care

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and

considered the responsibility of the owner.

chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a

mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove

heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR௡

Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,

non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,

a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR௡ or

equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.

If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or

similar cause that destroys the paint and protective

coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-

sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-

sibility of the owner.

•

If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or

de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective

packaged and sealed.

finish.

If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider

mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If

Equipped

Interior Care

Use MOPAR௡ Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- upholstery and MOPAR௡ Carpet Cleaner or equivalent

ner: for carpeting.

•

Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp

with a clean, dry towel.

cloth, or MOPAR௡ Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use

harsh cleaners or Armor All௡. Use MOPAR௡ Total Clean

or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.

•

Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

For tough stains, apply MOPAR௡ Total Clean or a mild

soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the

stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

MOPAR௡ Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-

mended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular

cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt

can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery

and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth

•

For grease stains, apply MOPAR௡ Multi-Purpose

Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and

remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove

soap residue.

Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of and MOPAR௡ Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be

protectants on Stain Repel products.

taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any

liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel

your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi- wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis

with MOPAR௡ Glass Cleaner or any commercial

WARNING!

household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type

cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-

dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear

quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do

not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may

scratch the elements.

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in

closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and

less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the

towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner

directly on the mirror.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore

different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care

must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-

lowed by rinsing.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397

1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol buckles do not work properly.

content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean

Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders

with a clean damp rag.

Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent

with the cupholder in the center console.

2. Dry with a soft tissue.

Seat Belt Maintenance

NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.

Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical

solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR௡ Total Clean, a

mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove

the belts from the vehicle to wash them.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FUSES

CAUTION!

Integrated Power Module

•

When installing the integrated power module

cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-

erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so

may allow water to get into the integrated power

module and possibly result in an electrical system

failure.

When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to

use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.

The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated

may result in a dangerous electrical system over-

load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it

indicates a problem in the circuit that must be

corrected.

The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the

engine compartment. This module contains fuses and

relays.

Integrated Power Module

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399

Cavity Car-

Mini-

Fuse

Description

Cavity Car-

Mini-

Fuse

Description

tridge

Fuse

—

15 Amp Washer Motor

Blue

25 Amp Powertrain Control

Natural Module (PCM)

25 Amp Ignition Run/Start

Natural

25 Amp Alternator

Natural

30 Amp

Pink

30 Amp

Pink

40 Amp

Green

50 Amp

Red

—

Windshield Wiper

—

Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) Valves

Radiator Fan

—

Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) Pump Motor

—

50 Amp

Red

—

25 Amp Ignition Coils/Injectors

Natural

Radiator Fan

—

30 Amp Starter

Green

—

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Car-

tridge

Mini-

Fuse

Description

Fuse

—

Rear Power Distribution Center

There is also a power distribution center located in the

trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center

contains fuses and relays.

Opening the Access Panel

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401

CAUTION!

•

When installing the power distribution center

cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-

erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so

may allow water to get into the power distribution

center and possibly result in an electrical system

failure.

When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to

use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.

The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated

may result in a dangerous electrical system over-

load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it

indicates a problem in the circuit that must be

corrected.

Rear Power Distribution Center

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Car-

Mini-

Fuse

Description

Cavity Car-

Mini-

Fuse

Description

tridge

Fuse

60 Amp

Yellow

—

Ignition Off Draw (IOD)

Cavity 1 of the Rear

Power Distribution

Center contains a black

IOD fuse needed for

vehicle processing dur-

ing assembly. The ser-

vice replacement part is

a 60 Amp yellow car-

tridge fuse.

Integrated Power Mod-

ule (IPM)

—

Integrated Power Mod-

ule (IPM)

30 Amp

Pink

—

Heated Seats – If

Equipped

—

20 Amp Fuel Pump

Yellow

20 Amp Sub Amp – If Equipped

Yellow

15 Amp Diagnostic Link Connec-

Blue

tor (DLC)/Wireless Con-

trol Module (WCM)/

Wireless Ignition Node

(WIN)

40 Amp

Green

—

40 Amp

Green

—

20 Amp Power Outlet

Yellow

—

11 *

—

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403

Cavity Car-

tridge

Mini-

Fuse

Description

Cavity Car-

tridge

Mini-

Description

Fuse

—

Fuse

—

12 *

13 *

—

10 Amp AC Heater Control/

Red

Cluster/Security Mod-

ule – If Equipped

—

10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con-

Red troller (ORC)

10 Amp Ignition Run

Red

5 Amp Cluster/Electronic Sta-

Orange bility Program (ESP)/

Powertrain Control

20 Amp Cluster

Yellow

20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet

Yellow

10 Amp Stop Lights

Red

—

Module (PCM)/Stop

Light Switch

—

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Car-

Mini-

Fuse

Description

Cavity Car-

Mini-

Fuse

Description

tridge

Fuse

—

10 Amp Door Modules/Power

—

10 Amp Cargo Light/Satellite

Red

Mirrors/Steering Con-

trol Module (SCM)

Red

Receiver (SDARS) Video

– If Equipped/Vehicle

Information Module – If

Equipped

—

10 Amp Heated Mirrors – If

Red Equipped

5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview

Orange Mirror/Heated Seats – If

Equipped/Switch Bank

5 Amp Antenna Module – If

Orange Equipped/Power Mir-

rors

25 Amp Hands-Free Phone – If

Natural Equipped/Video Moni-

tor – If Equipped/Radio

—

30 Amp

Pink

30 Amp

Pink

—

Front Blower Motor

—

Rear Window Defroster

15 Amp Transmission

Blue

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405

VEHICLE STORAGE

Cavity Car-

Mini-

Fuse

Description

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than

21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your

battery.

tridge

Fuse

20 Amp

Blue

—

Amplifier – If

Equipped/Sunroof – If

Equipped

•

Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of

service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the

air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes

in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will

ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the

possibility of compressor damage when the system is

started again.

* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses

(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an autho-

rized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are

fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The

passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit

breaker in cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power

window switch, and the passenger power window

switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity

13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of

these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

REPLACEMENT BULBS

LIGHT BULBS – Exterior

Bulb Number

Low Beam Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge

(HID) . . . . . . . . . . D1S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005

Front Park/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK

Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W

Front Side

Marker . . . . . . . . W5W (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057

Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057

Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757A

Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057

Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . . . . . . LED

License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W

LIGHT BULBS – Interior

Bulb Number

Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W

Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Visor Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220

Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

Shift Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140

Optional Door Map Pocket/

Cupholder. . . . LED

(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer

for replacement instructions.

All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass

cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved

and should not be used for replacement.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407

BULB REPLACEMENT

2. Remove the two fasteners from the back of the tail

lamp assembly.

Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and

Park/Turn Lamp

High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)

The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.

High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the

headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of

this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb

yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to

an authorized dealer for service.

NOTE: When HID headlamps are turned on, there is a

blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes

more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system

charges.

3. Pull back the trunk liner.

4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the

tail lamp assembly.

Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Lamp, and Backup

Lamp

5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.

1. Open the trunk.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6. Disconnect the electrical connector.

8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-

terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.

7. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to

access the bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counterclockwise to

remove.

1 — Tail/Stop Lamp Bulb

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409

2 — Tail Lamp Bulb

3 — Turn Signal Lamp Bulb

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

9. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and

install the replacement bulb.

10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail

lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.

11. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical

connector, and trunk liner.

12. Close the trunk.

License Lamp

1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear

fascia.

4 — Backup Lamp Bulb

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411

2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.

4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.

3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and 5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install

install the replacement bulb.

the screws.

1 — License Lamp Bulb

2 — Socket

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S.

Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

19 Gallons

72 Liters

Engine Oil with Filter

6.1 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-40, API Certified)

Cooling System *

7 Quarts

6.6 Liters

6.1 Liter Engine (MOPAR௡ Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile

Formula or equivalent)

15.2 Quarts

14.4 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant

MOPAR௡ Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-

brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.

Engine Oil

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operat-

ing conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine

oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725

and are approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5. The manufacturer recom-

mends the use of a full synthetic 5W-40 or equivalent engine oil.

Engine Oil Filter

Spark Plugs

Fuel Selection

MOPAR௡ Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.

PLZTR5A-13 (Gap 0.040 in [1.01 mm])

Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis

Component

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission

MOPAR௡ ATF+4௡ Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed

ATF+4௡ product.

Brake Master Cylinder

MOPAR௡ DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3

brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-

mended brake fluids.

Power Steering Reservoir

Rear Axle

MOPAR௡ Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR௡ ATF+4௡ Automatic Trans-

mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4௡ product.

MOPAR௡ Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W–90 (API GL-5) or equivalent

(with MOPAR௡ Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear Additive).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 416

Ⅵ Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 418

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is

must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

the continued proper functioning of the emissions control

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

system. These and all other maintenance services in-

equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-

cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best

played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,

vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-

indicating that an oil change is necessary.

tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating

conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash

driving.

in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime

will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Inspection and service should also be done anytime a

malfunction is suspected.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change

indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-

vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle

serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles

(805 km).

NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-

sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be

performed by any automotive repair establishment or

individual using any automotive part that has been

certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-

nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417

NOTE:

•

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-

The oil change indicator message will not monitor the strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-

time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, further information.

even if the oil change indicator message is NOT

illuminated.

At Each Stop for Fuel

•

Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance

Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve-

hicle” for further information.

•

Change your engine oil more often if you drive your

vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals

exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, which-

ever comes first.

Check the windshield washer solvent and add if

required.

Once a Month

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator

message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a

scheduled oil change is performed by someone other

than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by

referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in

•

Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or

damage.

Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals

as required.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

•

Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake

master cylinder, and power steering, add as needed.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance items

may result in damage to the vehicle.

Check all lights and other electrical items for correct

operation.

At Each Oil Change

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following

pages for the required maintenance intervals.

•

Change the engine oil filter.

Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419

6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or

6 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner

filter, and replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or

12 months.

❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or

12 months.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading

Date

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or

18 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner

filter, and replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect the exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 421

30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or

30 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles

equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner

filter, and replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect the exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or

42 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner

filter, and replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Inspect the exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,

or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 423

54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or

54 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect the exhaust system.

❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the

following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles

(170 000 km).

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or

66 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner

filter, and replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect the exhaust system.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 425

78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or

78 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner

filter, and replace if necessary.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect the exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or

90 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner

filter, and replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏

Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if

necessary.*

❏ Inspect the exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles

equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,

or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 427

102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or

102 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner

filter, and replace if necessary.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect the exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.

❏

Replace the spark plugs.

❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if

not done at 60 months.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or

114 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect the exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429

126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or

126 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner

filter, and replace if necessary.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Inspect the exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or

138 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner

filter, and replace if necessary.

❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.

❏ Inspect the CV joints.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Inspect the exhaust system.

❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for

damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet,

or frequent trailer towing.

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Odometer Reading

Date

Repair Order #

Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 431

* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer

to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions

warranty.

150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or

150 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏ Rotate tires.

❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles

equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

WARNING!

•

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you

have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform

a service job, take your vehicle to a competent

mechanic.

Failure to properly inspect and maintain your

vehicle could result in a component malfunction

and effect vehicle handling and performance. This

could cause an accident

Odometer Reading

Date

Dealer Code

Repair Order #

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

Ⅵ Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or

Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 435

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Ⅵ Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Ⅵ MOPAR௡ Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Ⅵ If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Ⅵ Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 436

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 436

▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,

D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

434 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Ⅵ Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Ⅵ Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire

Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 435

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental

vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it

is advisable to make these arrangements when you call

for an appointment.

Prepare For The Appointment

If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the

right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All

work to be performed may not be covered by the

warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service

manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s

service history. This can often provide a clue to the

current problem.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally

interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy

with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an

authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and

are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality

service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and

the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed

correctly and in a timely manner.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the

specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident

or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the

service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your

vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

436 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to an authorized

dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-

solved with this process.

•

Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

•

If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 247–9753

ship. They want to know if you need assistance.

Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center

•

If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621

concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

center.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- In Mexico contact:

ter should include the following information: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Phone: (800) 465–2001

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

•

Owner’s name and address

Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

Authorized dealership name

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 437

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail

manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you

cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer have any questions about the service contract, call the

center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-

has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter line at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-485-

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the 2001).

manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require

contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It

assistance can use the special needs relay service offered

is not responsible for any service contract other than the

by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711

manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-

and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with

vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,

a Bell Relay Service operator.

and you require service after the manufacturer’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in

to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.

repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

438 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

We appreciate that you have made a major investment WARRANTY INFORMATION

when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the

has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group

training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their

MOPARா PARTS

sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related

MOPAR௡ fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are

available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-

mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle

operating at its best.

concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain

vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals

known to the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain

products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-

cals known to the State of California to cause cancer

and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could

cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the

manufacturer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 439

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy 3V9.

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your authorized

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the

website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-

tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-

cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call

for an order form.

dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–

9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,

West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also

obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering

manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

•

Service Manuals

In Canada

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the

information that students and professional technicians

need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,

maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group

LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you

should contact the Customer Service Department imme-

diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety

defect to the Canadian government should write to:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

440 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

vehicle, system, and/or components is written in

straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,

and charts.

•

Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the

assistance of service and engineering specialists to

acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-

hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency

and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,

capabilities and safety tips.

•

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-

grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-

cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians

to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve- Call toll free at:

hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to

•

1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

1–800–387–1143 (Canada)

find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-

step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,

proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools

and equipment.

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

www.techauthority.com

•

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 441

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-

The following tire grading categories were established by teristics and climate.

the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The

specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer

in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,

and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on

wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and

requirements in addition to these grades.

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

442 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Temperature Grades

WARNING!

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat

and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all

passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-

sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test

wheel, than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for

a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

444 INDEX

About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,297 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 56,60,62

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,301 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 384 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,195

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383,412

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 372

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,301

Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,376 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,300

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 17

Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,376 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,375 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 17

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,62 Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,66,81,191 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,62 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 445

Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,30 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 263

Automatic Transaxle

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 23

Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,81

Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,390,391 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391,414 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,387

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . 288

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,301

Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388,414

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,297

Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,387

Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 78

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

446 INDEX

Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,407 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,406 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70,71,74,76

Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74

Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Caps, Filler

Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,222,224,227,236

Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,337 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,263 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Check Engine Light

Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 447

Connector

Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 247 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,397

Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 385 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382,386 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,267

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Dipsticks

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 383,412,413

Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

448 INDEX

Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 195

Disposal

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 199

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Emergency, In Case of

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Driving

On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 367,416

DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 258 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 155

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382,413

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 449

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,337 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,337

Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,379

Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,412,413

Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Filters

Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,412

Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,376

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,413

Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Flashers

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,145,189

Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 63 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

450 INDEX

Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333,413

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 413 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,189 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink௡) . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,366

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Gauges

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 451

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,24,122,290,332

General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 146

Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,150

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow

Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 146

Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 HomeLink௡ (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

452 INDEX

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,212,276

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70 Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,189

Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 453

Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,406

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,141

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,66,81,191

Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,300

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,297

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,407

Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,164

Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,146

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 306

Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 195

Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,189

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,407

Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,150

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,195

High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,189

Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,164

License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 198

Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,164

Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . 148

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

454 INDEX

Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,164

Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,407 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren

Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 198 (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74

SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 196,326 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,145,189 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 189 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,341 Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 198,367

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,164

Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 455

Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,60,64

Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,60,62

Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 333,413

Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,413

Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,438

MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,413

Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,412

Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,412

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

456 INDEX

Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366,367 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink௡) . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 313

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Power

Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,439

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 174

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293,294

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 152

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 457

Pretensioners

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Programming Transmitters

Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Remote Control

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 385 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 260

Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Radio, Satellite (Uconnect௡ studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

458 INDEX

Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,45

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Satellite Radio (Uconnect௡ studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,44,81

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 49

And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70,71,76

Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 459

Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,145,189

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,195 Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 383,413 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Sound System

Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Specifications

Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Service Engine Soon Light

Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,222,224,227,236 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,275

Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,285

Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

460 INDEX

Steering

Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 263

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293,294 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . 193,194,345

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound

Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,405 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,405 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 313

Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,317,441

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 53

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 461

Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,314 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 342

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,285,390

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,317 Transmitter Battery Service

Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink௡) . . 164

Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Transmitter Programming

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,42

Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

462 INDEX

Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Video Entertainment System™

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,189 (Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 247 Warning Lights

Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,149,379

Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Water

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,340,341 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,405 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,173

Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 17 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX 463

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,267 Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,149,379 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chrysler Group LLC

10C482-126-AC

Printed in U.S.A.

3rd Edition

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Belkin Switch G30 153 User Manual
Blue Rhino Outdoor Kitchen Island GBC730W C User Manual
Bosch Power Tools Cordless Saw 52314 User Manual
Breville Hot Beverage Maker BKE260 User Manual
Briggs Stratton Portable Generator Home Generator User Manual
Bryan Boilers Boiler HE CLM300 W FDG User Manual
Calphalon Waffle Iron HE500RW User Manual
Carrier Air Cleaner 120 60 1 User Manual
Casio Watch 2184 User Manual
Cisco Systems IP Phone 7925G EX User Manual